Panasonic of North America GA-120-COLR Connected Color Radio User Manual 00 Introduction 1 6

Panasonic Corporation of North America Connected Color Radio 00 Introduction 1 6

Contents

user manual 1

Download: Panasonic of North America GA-120-COLR Connected Color Radio User Manual 00 Introduction 1 6
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Panasonic of North America GA-120-COLR Connected Color Radio User Manual 00 Introduction 1 6
Document ID1585785
Application IDWWJrQ/33XVotA/amMgVa4Q==
Document Descriptionuser manual 1
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize365.17kB (4564616 bits)
Date Submitted2011-11-22 00:00:00
Date Available2012-01-06 00:00:00
Creation Date2011-11-22 15:47:46
Producing SoftwareArbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
Document Lastmod2011-11-22 15:47:46
Document Title00-Introduction 1..6
Document CreatorArbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode

Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
2012 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
eAssist Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Keys, Doors, and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-47
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (2,1)
2012 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-60
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-14
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-17
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, the
BUICK Emblem, and LACROSSE
are trademarks and/or service
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20867287 A First Printing
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Buick Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
©
iii
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com
2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
iv
Black plate (4,1)
Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury
or death.
Symbols
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
$:
Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/Stabilitrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
vi
Black plate (6,1)
Introduction
2 NOTES
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
In Brief
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Heated and Ventilated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Remote System . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eAssist Features
1-1
Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 1-24
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Performance and Maintenance
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-22
eAssist® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
High Voltage Safety
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 1-23
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Black plate (2,1)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
In Brief
A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.
I.
Front Storage on page 4‑2.
B. Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 5‑29 (If Equipped).
J.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑16.
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals on page 6‑4.
Driver Information Center
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
Driver Information Center
Display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
F.
Infotainment Display Screen.
G. Infotainment on page 7‑2.
H. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5
(If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6.
R. Power Door Locks on
page 2‑11.
Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
K. Cruise Control on page 9‑40.
L.
Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
M. Horn on page 5‑3.
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑27.
S. Parking Brake on page 9‑34.
T.
N. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2 (If Equipped).
O. Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 9‑16 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑18.
P.
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑10
(If Equipped).
Q. Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1
(If Equipped).
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4
(If Equipped).
1-3
Shift Lever Position Indicator.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑29.
U. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 9‑25.
V.
Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36.
StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑37 (If Equipped).
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑42.
Rear Window Sunshade on
page 2‑20 (If Equipped).
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-4
Black plate (4,1)
In Brief
7 : Press and release one time to
locate the vehicle. Press and hold
for at least two seconds to sound
the panic alarm. Press again to
cancel the panic alarm.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter will work up to 20 m
(65 ft) away from the vehicle. On
vehicles with remote start the
distance will be greater.
Remote Vehicle Start
Press the button to extend the key.
The key can be used for all locks.
This key is also used for the
ignition, if the vehicle does not have
pushbutton start.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors.
Q:
Press to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized.
V : Press and hold to open
the trunk.
For vehicles with this feature, the
engine can be started from outside
the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press and release
Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about two seconds if the vehicle
is not in view.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
In Brief
When the engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of
the following:
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑8.
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
To lock or unlock the doors:
From inside the vehicle, use the
door lock knob or the power
door lock controls, pull once on
the door handle to unlock it, and
a second time to open it.
From outside, use the key,
or press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3.
See Door Locks on page 2‑10.
K:
Q:
Press to unlock the doors.
Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑11.
1-5
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-6
Black plate (6,1)
In Brief
Trunk Release
The trunk may be opened by
pressing V on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the touch pad located on the rear of
the trunk above the license plate.
See Trunk on page 2‑12 for more
information.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑19.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle (C) under the
front of the seat cushion.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Press and hold the top or bottom of
the switch (B) to raise or lower the
seat. Release the switch when the
desired height is reached.
Windows
To raise or recline the seatback, use
the lever (A) on the outboard side of
the seat.
A. Seatback Recline Lever
B. Height Adjustment Switch
C. Seat Position Handle
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4
and Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6 for more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
In Brief
Power Seats
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑5.
1-7
Lumbar Adjustment
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the lumbar support,
if available:
To adjust the seat:
Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the
horizontal control forward or
rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
horizontal control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the control up or down.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt
the top of the vertical control
forward or rearward. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑6.
Press and hold the front or rear
of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support.
Press and hold the top or bottom
of the control to raise or lower
lumbar support.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑5.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-8
Black plate (8,1)
In Brief
Memory Features
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat and outside mirror
positions to the current driver
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
placed in OFF. These automatically
stored positions are referred to as
RKE Memory positions.
Storing Button Memory Positions
To save positions into Button
Memory:
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons on
the outboard side of the driver seat
are used to manually save and
recall the driver seat and outside
mirror positions. These manually
stored positions are referred to as
Button Memory positions.
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
recliner, and both outside mirrors
to the desired driving positions.
2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)
and “1” at the same time until a
beep sounds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a
second driver using “2.”
To recall the manually saved
Button Memory positions, press and
hold “1” or “2.” The driver seat and
outside mirrors move to the
positions stored to those buttons
when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
To automatically recall RKE Memory
positions, unlock the driver door
with the RKE transmitter, and open
the driver door. On vehicles with
Keyless Access, opening the driver
door when an RKE transmitter is
present will activate the RKE
Memory recall. If the driver door is
already open, pressing the RKE
transmitter K button will also
activate the RKE Memory recall.
The driver seat and outside mirrors
will move to the previously saved
RKE Memory positions.
See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 for
more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
In Brief
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature moves the seat
rearward allowing the driver more
room to exit the vehicle.
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
To activate, place the ignition in
OFF and open the driver door. If the
driver door is already open, placing
the ignition in OFF will activate the
easy exit driver seat.
1-9
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
For more information, see Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑10.
This feature is turned on or off using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Driver Seat Easy Exit” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Heated and Ventilated Seat
Buttons Shown, Heated Seat
Buttons Similar
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel. To operate,
the ignition must be on.
Press L to heat the seat cushion
and seatback or {, if equipped, to
ventilate the seat.
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-10
Black plate (10,1)
In Brief
Safety Belts
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
Safety Belts on page 3‑13.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑14.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑42.
Passenger Sensing
System
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. No other airbag
is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is
started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑27 for important
information.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Turn the control knob to the
L (left) or R (right) selecting the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Push the control knob to the left,
right, up, or down to adjust the
mirror.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
In Brief
Vehicles with the memory feature
can store a preferred mirror position.
See “Memory Seats” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 for
more information.
Interior
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Adjust this mirror for a clear view of
the area behind the vehicle. Hold
the mirror in the center to move it
up, down, or side to side. To reduce
headlamp glare from behind, push
the tab forward for daytime and pull
it for nighttime use.
These mirrors can be folded inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
return it to the original position.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
control buttons at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how
to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑17.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Automatic Dimming Feature
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming driver outside mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of the headlamps behind you.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
1-11
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-12
Black plate (12,1)
In Brief
Interior Lighting
Reading Lamps
Dome Lamps
There are front and rear reading
lamps.
The interior lamps control located in
the overhead console controls both
the front and rear interior lamps.
The front reading lamps are located
in the overhead console.
The rear reading lamps are located
in the headliner.
For more information, see:
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6.
Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.
Exterior Lighting
(:
H:
Turns the lamps off.
Turns the lamps on when any
door is opened.
' : Keeps the lamps on all
the time.
# or $ : Press to turn each lamp
on or off.
The exterior lamp control is located
on the instrument panel on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
In Brief
Turn the control to the following
positions:
Windshield Wiper/Washer
O : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released. Turn to
off again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
;:
Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
2 : Turns on the headlamps,
together with the parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps,
license plate lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
For more information, see:
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑2.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
1-13
The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move
the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
3 : Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
9 : Use to turn the windshield
wipers off.
2: Use for fast wipes.
3 : Briefly move the wiper lever
down for a single wipe or hold down
for several wipes.
1: Use for slow wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-14
Black plate (14,1)
In Brief
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
these systems.
Automatic Climate Control System
A. Power
F.
B. Temperature Control
G. Defrost
C. Fan Control
H. Air Conditioning
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
I.
E. Recirculation
AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Rear Window Defogger
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System for Non‐eAssist Vehicles
A. Power
G. Passenger Temperature Control
B. Driver Temperature Control
H. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
C. Defrost
I.
Rear Window Defogger
D. Fan Control
J.
Heated Steering Wheel
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
K. Air Conditioning
F.
L.
Recirculation/Automatic
Recirculation
ZONE
1-15
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-16
Black plate (16,1)
In Brief
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
shifting an automatic transmission
similar to a manual transmission.
DSC can be enabled through the
shift lever. See Manual Mode on
page 9‑31.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System for eAssist Vehicles
A. Power
H. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
B. Driver Temperature Control
I.
Rear Window Defogger
C. Defrost
J.
Eco Air Conditioning
D. Fan Control
K. Comfort Air Conditioning
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
L.
F.
See Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1 (If Equipped) or
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped).
Recirculation/Automatic
Recirculation
G. Passenger Temperature Control
ZONE
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
In Brief
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
VOL/O : Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
SOURCE: Press to choose
between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
Menu Knob: Turn to select radio
stations.
g:
Press to seek the previous
station or track.
l:
Press to seek the next station
or track.
Buttons 1‐6: Press to save and
select favorite stations.
1-17
INFO: Press to show available
information about the current station
or track.
Setting the Clock
See Overview (Radio with CD) on
page 7‑4 or Overview (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑6 or
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for more
information about these and other
radio features.
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date.
Storing a Favorite Station
Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be
stored in each favorite page and the
number of available favorite pages
can be set.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep
is heard.
See “Storing a Station as a
Favorite” in AM-FM Radio (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 or
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19
Adjusting the Time
2. Press + or ‐ to increase or
decrease hour and minute.
3. To save the time and return to
the Time Settings menu, press
the / BACK button at any time
or press SELECT after adjusting
the minutes.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date.
2. Press the 12/24 Hour button.
See Clock (With Date Display) on
page 5‑5 or Clock (Without Date
Display) on page 5‑6 or Clock
(Color Radio) on page 5‑6
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-18
Black plate (18,1)
In Brief
Satellite Radio
Portable Audio Devices
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with an XM™ satellite radio
tuner and a valid XM satellite radio
subscription can receive XM
programming.
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a
USB port located in the center
console. External devices such
as iPods®, laptop computers,
MP3 players, CD changers, and
USB storage devices may be
connected, depending on the
audio system.
The Bluetooth system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio
system, microphone, and controls.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A fee is
required to receive the XM service.
For more information refer to:
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
For more information, see Satellite
Radio on page 7‑23.
For more information, see Auxiliary
Devices (Radio with CD) on
page 7‑38 or Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) on
page 7‑41 or Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)
on page 7‑44.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
See Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 7‑57 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑59 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑64 or
Bluetooth (UHP Mexico Only) on
page 7‑70.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls
$ / i : Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again
to turn the sound on. For vehicles
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
press to reject an incoming call,
or to end a current call.
1-19
Cruise Control
_ SRC ^ :
Turn _ or ^ to select a
radio band or audio source.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or
previous favorite radio station, CD,
or MP3 track.
Press SRC to change between
radio and CD or DVD.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g : Press to interact with the
available Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system.
+ x −: Press + to increase or − to
decrease the volume.
5 : Press to turn the cruise control
system on and off.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
*:
Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-20
Black plate (20,1)
In Brief
See Cruise Control on page 9‑40.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POIs), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more.
Navigation System
See the navigation system manual
for more information.
B.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
C. MENU: Press to display the
Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle
Information menu. This button is
also used to return to or exit the
last screen displayed on
the DIC.
RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to
make the vehicle resume to a
previously set speed or to
accelerate.
SET/− : Move the thumbwheel
down toward SET/- to set a speed
and activate cruise control, or to
make the vehicle decelerate.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
navigation system manual that
includes information on the
radio, audio players, and
navigation system.
The DIC display is located in the
center of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems. The controls for
the DIC are located on the turn
signal lever.
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or
clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
w x: Use the thumbwheel to
scroll through the items in
each menu.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
In Brief
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the audio
system controls. These features
include:
Climate and Air Quality
Comfort and Convenience
Collision/Detection Systems
Language
Lighting
Power Door Locks
Remote Lock/Unlock
Return to Factory Settings
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the
rear bumper to detect objects while
parking the vehicle. It operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
URPA uses audible beeps to
provide distance and system
information.
1-21
Universal Remote System
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑42 for more information.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are two accessory power
outlets. One is located under the
armrest inside the center console
storage and the other is on the rear
of the center floor console.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote System. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Remote
System.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑46.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-22
Black plate (22,1)
In Brief
Sunroof
Vent: Press the rear of the
switch (B) to the first detent to vent
the sunroof. Press the front of the
switch (A) to the second detent to
close the sunroof.
Express-open/Express-close:
To express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release the rear of the
switch (B). To express-close, fully
press and release the front of the
switch (A). To stop the sunroof
partway, press either switch a
second time.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches are located on the
overhead console.
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑25.
The sunshade opens automatically
with the sunroof.
To express-open the sunshade, fully
press and release the rear of the
switch (C). To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a second
time. To express-close, fully press
and release the front of the
switch (D). To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
See Sunroof on page 2‑21.
eAssist Features
eAssist® Overview
If the vehicle has eAssist, there are
several additional features which
contribute to increased efficiency.
Vehicles with eAssist have an
automatic engine start/stop feature.
This feature saves fuel by shutting
the engine off when the vehicle is
stopped. When the engine shuts off
automatically, all the accessories
will continue to operate normally.
In very hot or cold conditions,
the engine will only shut off
automatically part of the time. See
Starting the Engine on page 9‑20.
There are two air conditioning
settings available. The comfort
setting maximizes cabin comfort.
The eco setting maximizes the
efficiency allowing more frequent,
and longer engine stops than the
comfort setting. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on
page 8‑4.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (23,1)
In Brief
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)
on page 9‑36.
Vehicles with eAssist have a slightly
different instrument cluster, which
includes an efficiency gauge, and
an AUTO STOP indicator on the
tachometer. See Instrument Cluster
on page 5‑9. There is also a
Power Flow Gauge in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
The eAssist system uses a high
voltage battery, which is cooled with
air drawn from the vehicle interior.
1-23
The negative 12-volt battery cable
and the high voltage cable in the
engine compartment are clearly
labeled. In emergency situations,
first responders can cut those
cables to disable the high voltage
battery system.
Driver Efficiency Gauge
The cold air intake for the battery is
located behind the rear seat, on the
filler panel. Do not cover the intake.
See Battery on page 10‑25.
High Voltage Safety
Information
eAssist vehicles have a standard
12-volt battery and a high voltage
battery. Only a trained service
technician with the proper
knowledge and tools should inspect,
test, or replace the high voltage
battery. See your dealer if the high
voltage battery needs service.
This gauge assists the driver in
operating the vehicle more
efficiently and will vary based on
driver input.
See Driver Efficiency Gauge on
page 5‑12 for more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-24
Black plate (24,1)
In Brief
Automatic Engine Start/
Stop Feature
Vehicles with eAssist have an
automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has
reached operating temperature, the
auto stop feature may cause the
engine to turn off when the brake
pedal is applied and the vehicle
comes to a complete stop. When
the brake pedal is released, or the
accelerator pedal is applied, the
engine will restart. The engine will
continue to run until the next
auto stop.
To restart the engine during the auto
stop, release the brake pedal or
press the accelerator pedal. The
engine starts immediately. The
vehicle continues to run until the
next stop.
AUTO STOP on the tachometer
signifies that the engine is in auto
stop mode. See Tachometer on
page 5‑11 for more information.
A chime will sound when the driver
door is opened while in auto stop
mode. Remember to shift to P (Park)
and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
before exiting the vehicle.
See Starting the Engine on
page 9‑20.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of
the energy from the moving vehicle
and turns it into electrical energy.
This energy is then stored in the
vehicle's high voltage battery
system, contributing to increased
fuel efficiency.
The system works whenever the
accelerator pedal is released, and
increases the energy captured as
more brake pedal is applied.
Battery
eAssist vehicles have a standard
12-volt battery and a high voltage
battery. When a new standard
12-volt battery is needed, see your
dealer for one that has the
replacement number shown on the
original battery's label. Only a
trained service technician with the
proper knowledge and tools should
inspect, test, or replace the high
voltage battery. See your dealer if
the high voltage battery needs
service. See Battery on page 10‑25.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (25,1)
In Brief
Service
Never try to do your own service on
eAssist components. You can be
injured and the vehicle can be
damaged if you try to do your own
service work. Service and repair of
these high voltage components
should only be performed by a
trained service technician with the
proper knowledge and tools. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑4.
Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
To turn off traction control,
press and release the Traction
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak button located on the
console to the right of the shift
lever. i illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑37.
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button again to turn
on traction control.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36.
1-25
StabiliTrak® System
The StabliTrak system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions. The
system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
To turn off both TCS and
StabiliTrak, press and hold the
TCS/StabiliTrak button, located
on the console to the right of
the shift lever, until i and g
illuminate and the appropriate
DIC message is displayed. See
Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑37.
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-26
Black plate (26,1)
In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑53.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑10. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
This vehicle may come with a spare
tire and tire changing equipment or
a tire sealant and compressor kit.
The kit can be used to temporarily
seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (With Pressure Relief Button) on
page 10‑67 or Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (With Pressure
Deflation Button) on page 10‑74 for
complete operating information.
If the vehicle came with a spare tire
and tire changing equipment, see
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑64.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Press the DIC MENU button on
the turn signal lever to enter the
Vehicle Information Menu. Use
the thumbwheel to scroll through
the menu items until you reach
REMAINING OIL LIFE.
3. Press the SET/CLR button to
reset the oil life at 100%.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (27,1)
In Brief
1-27
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
Roadside Assistance
Program
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
U.S.: 1-800-252-1112
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
As the owner of a new Buick, you
are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
Mexico: 01-800-466-0818
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9 for more
information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
1-28
Black plate (28,1)
In Brief
Roadside Service and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
Online Owner Center
(U.S. and Canada)
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will be
sent to an OnStar Advisor who will
assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the
help you need.
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Sign up today at:
www.buickownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
OnStar®
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1 for more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys, Doors, and
Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Doors
Interior Mirrors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-20
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-2
Black plate (2,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the
RKE transmitter in the vehicle
and they could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not
leave the RKE transmitter in a
vehicle with children.
The key that is part of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can
be used for the ignition and all locks
if the vehicle is a key access
vehicle. If the vehicle has the
keyless ignition, the key can be
used for the locks.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Press the button on the RKE
transmitter to extend the key. Press
the button and the key blade to
retract the key.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If locked out of the vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
2-3
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
The transmitter functions will work
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the
vehicle. On vehicles with remote
start the distance will be greater.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Keep in mind that other conditions,
such as those previously stated, can
impact the performance of the
transmitter.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-4
Black plate (4,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-theft Alarm System on
page 2‑13.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors. See “Door
Unlock Options” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
RKE without Remote Start Shown
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking, see “Locking
Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through the
vehicle personalization.
If the passenger door is open when
Q is pressed, all doors lock.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-theft Alarm System on
page 2‑13.
Memory seat positions may be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
See “Memory Seats” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 and
“Remote Recall” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
V (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to unlock the trunk.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release
one time to locate the vehicle.
The exterior lamps flash and the
horn chirps.
Press and hold 7 for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For
vehicles with this feature, press Q
and then press and hold / within
five seconds to start the engine from
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑8 for additional
information.
The buttons on the keys are
disabled when there is a key is in
the ignition, if equipped.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keyless Access Operation
Lock Sensor
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Keyless Unlocking
Entering any door other than the
driver door will always cause all of
the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
To customize which doors unlock
when the driver door is opened, see
“Door Unlock Options” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Lift up on the touch pad located
above the license plate to open
the trunk if the RKE transmitter is
within range.
Some vehicles have a keyless
access system that lets you lock
and unlock the doors and access
the trunk without removing the RKE
transmitter from your pocket, purse,
briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter
should be within 1 m (3 ft) of the
door or trunk being opened.
With the RKE transmitter within
1 m (3 ft), approach the front door
and pull the handle to unlock and
open the door. If the transmitter is
recognized, the door will unlock
and open.
2-5
When all doors are closed and the
ignition is off, the vehicle can be
locked by pressing this area on the
door handle. This feature will be
available for several minutes after
the vehicle has been turned off.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work. Any remaining
transmitters will need to be
reprogrammed. Each vehicle
can have up to five transmitters
matched to it.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-6
Black plate (6,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter (Keyless Access
Vehicles Only)
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
To program, the vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters, both
currently recognized and new, must
be with you.
1. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
2. Insert the vehicle key of the
new transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn
the key to the unlock position
five times within 10 seconds.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays READY FOR
REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.
3. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is located
inside the center console
storage area under the
cupholder. The cupholder will
need to be pulled out to access
the transmitter pocket.
4. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned, the DIC
will show that it is ready to
program the next transmitter.
5. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 10 seconds to
exit programming mode.
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)
If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow this
procedure to program up to five
transmitters. This feature is not
available in Canada. This procedure
will take approximately 30 minutes
to complete. The vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters you wish
to program must be with you.
1. Insert the vehicle key of the
transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn
the key to the unlock position
five times within 10 seconds.
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays
REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
PLEASE WAIT.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the
DIC displays PRESS ENGINE
START BUTTON TO LEARN
and then press the ignition.
The DIC displays will again
show REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
times. After the third time, all
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters
can be relearned during the
next steps.
The DIC display should
now show READY FOR
REMOTE # 1.
4. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is located
inside the center console
storage area under the
cupholder. The cupholder will
need to be pulled out to access
the transmitter pocket.
2-7
5. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the
DIC will show that it is ready to
program the next transmitter.
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press K.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4
through 6.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 10 seconds to
exit programming mode.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
If the transmitter battery is weak, the
DIC may display NO REMOTE
DETECTED when you try to start
the vehicle. The REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message may also be displayed
at this time.
To start the vehicle:
1. Remove the cupholder from the
center console storage area.
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing up.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the START/STOP
button. See Starting the Engine
on page 9‑20 for additional
information about the
vehicle's keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-8
Black plate (8,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Battery Replacement
Remote Vehicle Start
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
See “REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑36.
If available, this feature allows the
engine to be started from outside
the vehicle.
The battery is not rechargeable.
To replace the battery:
1. Push the button on the
transmitter to extend the key.
2. Remove the battery cover by
prying it with a finger.
3. Remove the battery by pushing
on the battery and sliding it
toward the key blade.
The / button will be on the
RKE transmitter if the vehicle has
remote start.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Starting the Engine Using
Remote Start
4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Push the battery
down until it is held in place.
Replace with a CR2032 or
equivalent battery.
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
5. Snap the battery cover back on
to the transmitter.
2. Press and release
1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entry
transmitter at the vehicle.
Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about two seconds if the vehicle
is not in view.
When the vehicle starts, the
parking lamps will turn on and
remain on as long as the engine
is running. The doors will be
locked and the climate control
system may come on.
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
(key access), or select the ON/RUN/
START ignition position (keyless
access), to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time extension
is done or the ignition is put in ON/
RUN (key access) or ON/RUN/
START (keyless access).
When the vehicle is started
remotely, the climate control system
will use the last setting before the
vehicle was shut off. See “Remote
Start Climate Control Opertation” in
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Climate Control System on
page 8‑4. Vehicles with heated or
heated and ventilated front seats
can have this feature turn on
automatically during a remote start.
See “Remote Start Heated Seats”
and “Remote Start Cooled Seats”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
Extending Engine Run Time
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
The vehicle's ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
2-9
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
The remote start will not operate if:
The key is in the ignition (key
access) or the ignition is in any
position other than OFF (keyless
access).
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do any of
the following:
The transmitter is in the vehicle
(keyless access).
The hood is not closed.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-10
Black plate (10,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Door Locks
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when slowing or stopping the
vehicle. Lock the doors to
help prevent this from
happening.
To lock and unlock the doors from
the outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the key.
To lock the doors from inside, use
the power door lock switch or door
lock knob. To unlock the doors, use
the power door lock switch or pull
once on the door handle to unlock it,
and a second time to open it.
Manually locking the driver door
also automatically locks all
other doors.
For more information see:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Power Door Locks on page 2‑11.
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
2-11
Safety Locks
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door is
open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all the doors.
K (Unlock):
Press to unlock all
doors.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all doors.
See “Power Door Locks” in Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Press o { to activate the safety
locks on the rear doors. The
LED (A) comes on when activated.
The rear door power windows are
also disabled.
Press o { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
If the light flashes, the feature may
not be working properly.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-12
Black plate (12,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Trunk
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
Control Systems” in the
Index.
If the vehicle has a power
liftgate, disable the power
liftgate function.
{ WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
Close all of the windows.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑28.
Remote Trunk Release
To open the trunk from outside the
vehicle, press V on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
or press the touch pad above the
license plate.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
2-13
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
Anti-theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
Arming the System
There is an emergency trunk
release handle located inside the
trunk on the trunk latch. On some
vehicles, the release handle can be
accessed by folding the rear seat
center seatback. See Rear Seats on
page 3‑11. Pull the release handle
to open the trunk from the inside.
To arm the system, press
RKE transmitter.
Q on the
The alarm automatically arms after
about 30 seconds. The security
light, located on the instrument
panel, flashes.
Press V on the RKE transmitter to
open the trunk without setting off the
alarm. The system rearms when the
trunk is closed.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-14
Black plate (14,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Disarming the System
Immobilizer
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
K on the RKE transmitter.
Press
Approach the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter (keyless
access).
Start the engine.
The alarm automatically disarms.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
If K is pressed and the horn
sounds, an attempted break-in has
occurred while the system was
armed.
If the alarm has been activated, the
THEFT ATTEMPTED message will
appear on the DIC. See Anti-theft
Alarm System Messages on
page 5‑38 for additional information.
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be damaged. See your
dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the transmitter
leaves the vehicle.
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the ignition button is
pushed in and a valid transmitter is
found in the vehicle.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
The system has one or more
transmitters that are matched to an
immobilizer control unit in your
vehicle. Only a correctly matched
transmitter will start the vehicle.
If the transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
2-15
If the RKE appears to be
undamaged, try another transmitter.
Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
located in the center console. See
“No Remote Detected” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 5‑36.
If the engine does not start with the
other transmitter or when the
transmitter is in the pocket in the
center console, your vehicle needs
service. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new transmitter
programmed to the vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-16
Black plate (16,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Exterior Mirrors
Power Mirrors
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
These mirrors can be folded inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
return it to the original position.
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Folding Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Feature
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Turn the control knob to the
L (left) or R (right) selecting the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Push the control knob to the left,
right, up, or down to adjust the
mirror.
Vehicles with the memory feature
can store a preferred mirror position.
See “Memory Seats” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 for
more information.
The vehicle may have a driver
outside mirror that automatically
adjusts for the glare of the
headlamps behind you.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may have a turn signal
indicator lamp built into the mirror
housing. The turn signal lamp
flashes with the use of the vehicle's
turn signal and hazard flashers.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Heated Mirrors
Park Tilt Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
If the vehicle is equipped with
memory mirrors, there is an option
to have the mirrors tilt down, when
in R (Reverse), to more easily see
the ground near the vehicle.
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 8‑1 for more information.
When the vehicle is shifted to
R (Reverse), both the driver and
passenger mirrors will tilt downward.
They will return to their previous
position when the vehicle is shifted
out of R (Reverse), the ignition is
turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left
in R (Reverse) for an extended
period of time.
This feature can be turned on or off.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
2-17
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the inside rearview mirror for
a clear view of the area behind your
vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar have three
control buttons at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer for more
information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-18
Black plate (18,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
On vehicles with an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror the
automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you.
Vehicles with OnStar have three
control buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Power Windows
Express Window Operation
2-19
Rear Window Lockout
Windows with an express-up or
down feature allow the front
windows to be lowered or raised
without holding the switch. Rear
windows only have express-down.
Pull a window switch up or push it
down all the way, release it, and
the window goes down or up
automatically. Stop the window by
pushing or pulling the switch.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
The switches work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑25.
Press o { to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The LED (A)
comes on when activated.
The rear door locks are also
disabled. See Safety Locks on
page 2‑11.
Press o { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-20
Black plate (20,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Programming the Power
Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected, or
is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window
for the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Sun Visors
To open the sunshade, press and
release the switch. The sunshade
will fully extend. To close the
sunshade, press and release the
switch again. The sunshade will
fully close.
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power
(RAP), close all doors.
If the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) when the sunshade is
extended, it will automatically close.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
On vehicles with a rear window
sunshade, the switch is on the
console to the right of the shift lever.
The sunshade only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
To program each front window:
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
Rear Window Sunshade
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Roof
Sunroof
Vent
The sunroof has an express-vent
open feature. From the closed
position, press the rear of the
sunroof switch (B) to the first detent
to vent the sunroof. To close the
sunroof, press the front of the
sunroof switch (A) to the second
detent.
Express-Open/Express-Close
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch is located on the overhead
console.
The sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑25.
To express-open the sunroof from
the closed or vent position, fully
press and release the rear of the
switch (B). The sunroof opens
automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second
time. To express-close the sunroof,
fully press and release the front of
the switch (A). The sunroof closes
automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a
second time.
If the sunshade is closed, it opens
automatically with the sunroof but
can also be express-opened/
express-closed by using the
2-21
sunshade control (C) or (D). The
sunshade cannot be fully closed
with the sunroof open.
To express-open the sunshade from
the closed position, fully press and
release the rear of the switch (C).
The sunshade opens automatically.
To stop the sunshade partway,
press the switch a second time.
To express-close the sunshade fully
press and release the front of the
switch (D). The sunshade closes
automatically. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel
may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly.
Always close the glass panel
before closing the sunshade.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
2-22
Black plate (22,1)
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from
closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof and
sunshade will then return to the
open or vent position. To close the
sunroof once the obstruction
has been removed, refer to
"Express-Open/Express-Close"
earlier in this section.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause issues with sunroof
operation and noise. It could also
plug the water drainage system.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Seats
Airbag System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-23
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-32
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-33
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-2
Black plate (2,1)
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . .
3-34
3-36
3-39
3-41
3-42
3-50
3-50
3-52
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Seats and Restraints
Front Seat
Rear Seat
3-3
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑42.
To raise or lower the head restraint,
press the release button located on
the side of the head restraint and
pull up or push the head restraint
down and release the button.
Pull and push on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The front head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the release button, located on the
head restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the head
restraint down.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-4
Black plate (4,1)
Seats and Restraints
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Seat Position
WARNING (Continued)
Height Adjustment
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver seat
only when the vehicle is not
moving.
To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle under the front
of the seat cushion.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving.
(Continued)
3. Try to move the seat back
and forth to be sure it is locked
in place.
Press and hold the top or bottom of
the switch to raise or lower the seat.
Release the switch when the
desired height is reached.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
Lumbar Adjustment
3-5
To raise or lower lumbar support,
press and hold the top or bottom of
the control.
Release the control when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑5 for more information.
To adjust a power seat:
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire control up
or down.
If available, press and hold the front
or rear of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-6
Black plate (6,1)
Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING (Continued)
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
(Continued)
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked,
it could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Seats and Restraints
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
3-7
Memory Seats
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
To return the seatback to the
upright position:
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons on
the outboard side of the driver seat
are used to manually save and
recall the driver seat and outside
mirror positions. These manually
stored positions are referred to as
Button Memory positions.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-8
Black plate (8,1)
Seats and Restraints
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat and outside mirror
positions to the current driver
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
placed in OFF. These automatically
stored positions are referred to as
RKE Memory positions. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
Storing Button Memory Positions
To save positions into Button
Memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
recliner, and both outside mirrors
to the desired driving positions.
2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)
and “1” at the same time until a
beep sounds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a
second driver using “2.”
Recalling Button Memory
Positions
Recalling RKE Memory Positions
(Memory Remote Recall)
To recall the manually saved Button
Memory positions, press and hold
“1” or “2.” The driver seat and
outside mirrors move to the
positions stored to those buttons
when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
The Memory Remote Recall feature
can recall the driver seat and
outside mirrors to previously stored
RKE Memory positions when
entering the vehicle.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the recall may stop.
Remove the obstruction; then press
and hold the appropriate manual
control for the memory item that is
not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the memory position again
by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still
not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Every time the ignition is placed in
OFF, the positions of the driver seat
and outside mirrors are
automatically stored to the RKE
transmitter that was used to start
the vehicle. These positions are
called RKE Memory positions and
may be different than the previously
mentioned Button Memory positions
saved to the “1” or “2” buttons. To
automatically recall RKE Memory
positions, unlock the driver door
with the RKE transmitter, and open
the driver door. On vehicles with
Keyless Access, opening the driver
door when an RKE transmitter is
present will activate the RKE
Memory recall. If the driver door is
already open, pressing the RKE
transmitter K button will also
activate the RKE Memory recall.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Seats and Restraints
The driver seat and outside mirrors
will move to the previously saved
RKE Memory positions.
This feature is turned on or off using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Remote Recall” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory, power mirror,
or power seat controls.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the recall may stop.
Remove the obstruction; then press
and hold the appropriate manual
control for the memory item that is
not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the memory position again
by opening the driver door and
pressing the RKE transmitter
K button. If the memory position is
still not recalling, see your dealer
for service.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature moves the seat
rearward allowing the driver more
room to exit the vehicle.
To activate, place the ignition in
OFF and open the driver door. If the
driver door is already open, placing
the ignition in OFF will activate the
easy exit driver seat.
This feature is turned on or off using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Driver Seat Easy Exit” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory or power seat
controls.
3-9
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-10
Black plate (10,1)
Seats and Restraints
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated and
Ventilated Seats
Heated and Ventilated Seat
Buttons Shown, Heated Seat
Buttons Similar
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel. To operate,
the ignition must be on.
During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats, if equipped, can be
turned on automatically. They are
canceled when the ignition is turned
on. Press the button to use the
heated or ventilated seats after the
vehicle is started.
Press L to heat the seat cushion
and seatback or {, if equipped, to
ventilate the seat.
The heated or ventilated seat
indicator lights on the button do not
turn on during a remote start.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
Seats and Restraints
The heated seat temperature
performance of an unoccupied seat
may be reduced. This is normal.
Rear Seats
The heated or ventilated seats will
not turn on during a remote start
unless they are enabled in the
vehicle personalization menu. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑8
and “Remote Start Heated Seats” or
“Remote Start Cooled Seats” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Fold a seatback only when the
vehicle is not moving.
3-11
To fold the seatback down:
Folding the Seatback
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Rear Seat with Safety Belt
Retainer Clip Shown
1. Before folding the seatback,
make sure the safety belt is in
the retainer clip (if equipped).
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-12
Black plate (12,1)
Seats and Restraints
Raising the Seatback
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Rear Seat with Safety Belt Guide
Loop Shown
2. Pull on the lever on the top of
the seatback to unlock it.
A tab near the seatback lever
raises when the seatback is
unlocked.
3. Fold the seatback down.
Repeat the steps to fold the
other seatback, if desired.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
To raise a seatback:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it
rearward to lock it in place.
Make sure the safety belt is in
the retainer clip (if equipped)
and is not twisted or caught in
the seatback.
A tab near the seatback lever
retracts when the seatback is
locked in place.
2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
3. Repeat the steps to raise the
other seatback, if necessary.
When the seat is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much
worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle.
In addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
3-13
Why Safety Belts Work
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
check that all passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑14 for additional information.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
as fast as the vehicle does. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
going until something stops you.
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts!
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-14
Black plate (14,1)
Seats and Restraints
When you wear a safety belt, you
and the vehicle slow down together.
There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the
safety belts. That is why wearing
safety belts makes such good
sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
and Young Children on page 3‑36.
Follow those rules for everyone's
protection.
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection.
Also, in nearly all states and in
all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
There are important things to know
about wearing a safety belt properly.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older
Children on page 3‑34 or Infants
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front
of you.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
Seats and Restraints
Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
Wear the lap part of the belt low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured,
or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
(Continued)
3-15
WARNING (Continued)
Never allow the lap or
shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see
“Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-16
Black plate (16,1)
Seats and Restraints
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑19.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
webbing, when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑14.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
Seats and Restraints
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
Press the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing the slide/
trim up. After the adjuster is set to
the desired position, try to move it
down without pushing the release
button to make sure it has locked
into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
3-17
There is one guide for each outside
passenger position in the rear seat.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and probably
other parts of the vehicle's safety
belt system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash on page 3‑20.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-18
Black plate (18,1)
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
3-19
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑14 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑20.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-20
Black plate (20,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a
Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑14.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
Seats and Restraints
Airbag System
The vehicle may have the following
airbags:
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the front
outboard passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the front outboard
passenger.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.
Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row
outboard passengers.
All of the airbags have the word
AIRBAG embossed on the trim or
on a label near the deployment
opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front
outboard passenger.
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
side of the seatback closest to
the door.
3-21
For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-22
Black plate (22,1)
Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate
in every crash. In some crashes
safety belts are the only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑24.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce the chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
an eye, anyone who is up
against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑34 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑36.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (23,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-23
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑14 for more
information.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
The driver and front outboard
passenger seat-mounted side
impact airbags are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
front outboard passenger, and
second row outboard passengers
are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-24
Black plate (24,1)
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar
On vehicles with second row seat‐
mounted side impact airbags, they
are in the sides of the rear seatback
closest to the door.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie‐down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries, mainly to the driver's or
front outboard passenger's head
and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (25,1)
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds depending on
whether the vehicle hits an object
straight on or at an angle, and
whether the object is fixed or
moving, rigid or deformable,
narrow or wide.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full
deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 3‑21.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes depending on the location
of the impact. In addition, these
roof‐rail airbags are intended to
inflate during a rollover or in a
severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Roof‐rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to inflate on the side
of the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof‐rail airbags will inflate when
either side of the vehicle is struck or
if the sensing system predicts that
3-25
the vehicle is about to roll over on
its side, or in a severe frontal
impact.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
vehicle damage or repair costs.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
For airbag location, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 3‑23.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-26
Black plate (26,1)
Seats and Restraints
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
What Will You See after
an Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they inflate. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3‑23.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts by
distributing the force of the impact
more evenly over the
occupant's body.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑24 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps, turn on the
hazard warning flashers, and
shut off the fuel system after the
airbags inflate.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (27,1)
Seats and Restraints
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps, and turn off the
hazard warning flashers by using
the controls for those features.
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for the vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑18 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑19.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
3-27
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the front
outboard passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator
will light on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF will be
visible during the system check.
If you use remote start, if equipped,
to start the vehicle from a distance
you may not see the system check.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-28
Black plate (28,1)
Seats and Restraints
When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
the word OFF will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑15.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. No other airbag
is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
should be allowed to inflate or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag inflates.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the passenger frontal
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
passenger frontal airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
inflate under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front outboard passenger
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (29,1)
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
A front outboard passenger
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit
as a reminder that the airbags are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑15.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front outboard
passenger seat. When the
passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbags to be enabled,
the on indicator will light and stay
lit as a reminder that the airbags
are active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the
person's seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
3-29
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑14 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-30
Black plate (30,1)
Seats and Restraints
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 3‑50 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑52.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may
or may not turn off the airbag for a
child in a child restraint depending
upon the child's seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. Use the
following steps to allow the system
to detect that person and enable
the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag :
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (31,1)
Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑32 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger
frontal airbag when liquid is
soaked into the seat. If this
happens, the off indicator will be
lit, and the airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel will also
be lit.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will turn on the
passenger frontal airbag while a
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
frontal airbag is turned on, the
on indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑14 for
important safety information.
3-31
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on an
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
the seat.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-32
Black plate (32,1)
Seats and Restraints
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑16.
{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the
vehicle's frame, bumper system,
height, front end or side sheet
metal, may keep the airbag system
from working properly.
The operation of the airbag system
can also be affected by changing or
moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring.
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing
and diagnostic module, and
airbag wiring.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
front outboard passenger position,
which includes sensors that are
part of the passenger seat. The
passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑27.
If your vehicle needs to be modified
because you have a disability and
you have questions about whether
the modifications will affect the
vehicle's airbag system, or if you
have questions about whether the
airbag system will be affected if the
vehicle is modified for any other
reason, call Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (33,1)
Seats and Restraints
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑14 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbags, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 3‑23. See your dealer for
service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will
need to replace airbag system
parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
3-33
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 5‑14 for more information.
Vehicles with eAssist have a
high voltage battery and a standard
12‐volt battery. If an airbag inflates
or the vehicle has been in a crash,
the vehicle's sensing system may
shut down the high voltage system.
When this occurs, the high voltage
battery is disconnected and the
vehicle is not charging the 12‐volt
battery or the electrical system.
The vehicle may start but it shuts
down once the 12‐volt battery is
depleted. When the 12‐volt battery
is depleted, the vehicle will not start
and the on‐board jump start feature
is disabled. The airbag readiness
light and/or the 12‐volt battery
warning light are displayed. Before
the vehicle can be operated again, it
must be serviced at your dealer.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-34
Black plate (34,1)
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, then return to the
booster seat.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (35,1)
Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING (Continued)
The child might also slide under
the lap belt. The belt force would
then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
3-35
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury.
(Continued)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-36
Black plate (36,1)
Seats and Restraints
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and
never allow children to play with
the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them.
Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by
appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (37,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
3-37
It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-38
Black plate (38,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an
infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (39,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-39
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-40
Black plate (40,1)
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑42 for
more information.
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
In some areas, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child within the
Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (41,1)
Seats and Restraints
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
3-41
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑27 for additional
information.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-42
Black plate (42,1)
Seats and Restraints
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the
top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
the vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (43,1)
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
3-43
The child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the
top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the
top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the
child restraint.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-44
Black plate (44,1)
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
To assist in locating the lower
anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist in locating the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on
the filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (45,1)
Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑41 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
3-45
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑41.
You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-46
Black plate (46,1)
Seats and Restraints
but you can install two of them.
If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the
passenger-side position, and install
the other one either in the
driver-side position or in the center
position. If you need to install child
restraints in both the center and
driver‐side position, the one in the
center seating position will need to
be secured using the vehicle safety
belts instead of the LATCH anchors.
Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
Use anchors 3 and 4 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in seating position B.
Use anchors 4 and 5 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in seating position C.
Installing child restraints using
LATCH in seating positions B and C
at the same time is prohibited.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seating
Position and Lower Anchors
1 and 2
B. Center Rear Seating Position
and Lower Anchors 3 and 4
C. Driver Side Rear Seating
Position and Lower Anchors
4 and 5
There are five lower LATCH anchors
in the rear seat.
Use anchors 1 and 2 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in seating position A.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (47,1)
Seats and Restraints
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint
interferes with the proper
installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint
may be removed. See
“Head Restraint Removal
and Reinstallation” at the
end of this section.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
3-47
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint, or the
headrest or head restraint
has been removed, and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint, or the
headrest or head restraint
has been removed, and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-48
Black plate (48,1)
Seats and Restraints
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
installation.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (49,1)
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation
3-49
4. When the child restraint is
removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
position is used.
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere with
the proper installation of the child
restraint.
{ WARNING
To remove the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
forward. See Rear Seats on
page 3‑11 for additional
information.
2. Press both buttons on the head
restraint posts at the same time,
and pull up on the head
restraint.
3. Store the head restraint in the
trunk of the vehicle.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-50
Black plate (50,1)
Seats and Restraints
To reinstall the head restraint:
3. Try to move the head restraint
to make sure that it is locked
in place.
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
1. Insert the head restraint posts
into the holes in the top of the
seatback. The notches (A) on
the posts must face the driver
side of the vehicle.
2. Push the head restraint down.
If necessary, press the height
adjustment release button to
further lower the head restraint.
See Head Restraints on
page 3‑2.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint
in a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑42 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑42 for top tether anchor
locations.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (51,1)
Seats and Restraints
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
Reinstallation” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑42.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑41.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint interferes
with the proper installation of the
child restraint, the head restraint
may be removed. See “Head
Restraint Removal and
3-51
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-52
Black plate (52,1)
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑42 for more
information.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it. If the
head restraint was removed,
reinstall it before the seating
position is used. See “Head
Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑42 for additional
information on installing the head
restraint properly.
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑41.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat‐
mounted side impact airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑27 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑15 for more information,
including important safety
information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (53,1)
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑27 for additional
information.
3-53
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑42 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑42 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-54
Black plate (54,1)
Seats and Restraints
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side airbag,
the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑15.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (55,1)
Seats and Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑27 for
more information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
3-55
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
3-56
Black plate (56,1)
Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Storage
Storage
Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-1
Cupholders
Glove Box
The glove box is located on the
passenger side of the instrument
panel. Lift up on the lever to open it.
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
There are removable cupholders
located in the center console.
Slide the cover (A) to access
the cupholders.
Cupholders are also located in the
rear center armrest.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
4-2
Black plate (2,1)
Storage
Front Storage
Center Console Storage
An accessory power outlet is in the
lower area. See Power Outlets on
page 5‑6.
Some vehicles might also have
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD) on page 7‑38 or
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with CD/
DVD and MEM) on page 7‑41 or
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with CD
and Touchscreen) on page 7‑44.
Pull up on the handle (A) and pull
the cover down to open.
The armrest can be adjusted by
sliding it to the desired position.
The center console has an upper
tray and a lower main storage area.
To access the main storage area,
adjust the armrest to the rear
position and push button (A) to
open. Push button (B) to access
the upper tray.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Storage
Additional Storage
Features
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net located in
the trunk to store small loads as far
forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
Attach the net so the opening is
facing up. Attach the net loops to
the hooks on the rear panel of the
trunk.
4-3
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
4-4
Black plate (4,1)
Storage
2 NOTES
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 5-5
Clock (Without Date
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Clock (Color Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-21
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-25
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-1
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-29
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Messages . . . .
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Messages . . . .
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .
Engine Power Messages . . . .
Fuel System Messages . . . . . .
Key and Lock Messages . . . . .
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-2
Black plate (2,1)
Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
Controls
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Steering Wheel Controls
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with a Bluetooth®, OnStar,
or navigation system, press to
interact with those systems. See
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑57
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Instruments and Controls
on page 7‑59 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑64 or
Bluetooth (UHP Mexico Only) on
page 7‑70, OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1, or the navigation manual
for more information.
Heated Steering Wheel
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
( : Press to turn the heated
steering wheel on or off. A light on
the button displays when the feature
is turned on.
_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control):
Turn to select an audio source.
Horn
Press a
Press _ or ^ to select the next or
previous favorite radio station, CD,
or MP3 track.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume. Press − to
decrease the volume.
5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer
For vehicles with a heated steering
wheel, the button for this feature is
located on the climate control
system.
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.
on the steering wheel
pad to sound the horn.
The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move
the windshield wiper lever to select
the wiper speed.
2: Use for fast wipes.
1: Use for slow wipes.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-4
Black plate (4,1)
Instruments and Controls
Wipe Parking
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/
OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,
or 3, they will immediately stop.
3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
9 (Off):
Use to turn the windshield
wipers off.
3 (Mist):
Briefly move the wiper
lever down for a single wipe or hold
down for several wipes.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they
are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
Damaged wiper blades should be
replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑27.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to 9 before the driver door
is opened, or within 10 minutes, the
wipers will restart and move to the
base of the windshield.
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/
OFF during a windshield wash, the
wipers will stop when they reach the
base of the windshield.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
The wipers will continue until the
lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
When the windshield wiper lever is
released, additional wipes may
occur depending on how long the
windshield washer had been
activated.
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑22 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and Controls
See Backglass Antenna on
page 7‑25 and Satellite Radio
Antenna on page 7‑26 for the
location of the vehicle's antennas.
The compass system is designed to
operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
the GPS signal is restored and
provide a heading again. See
Compass Messages on page 5‑34
for more information on the
messages that may be displayed for
the compass.
Clock (With Date Display)
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on
page 7‑12 for information about
how to use the menu system.
Setting the Time and Date
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press H.
2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
the highlighted value.
4. Press SELECT to select the
next value.
5. To save the time or date and
return to the Time and Date
Settings menu, press the
/ BACK button at any time or
press SELECT after adjusting
the minutes or year.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press H.
2. Highlight Set Time Format.
3. Press SELECT to select the
12 hour or 24 hour display
format.
5-5
Setting the Month and Day
Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press H.
2. Highlight Set Date Format.
3. Press SELECT to select
MM/DD/YY (month/day/year) or
DD/MM/YY (day/month/year).
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press H.
2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
3. Press SELECT to turn Auto
Time Adjust on or off.
4. Press SELECT to select Time
Zone, and then select the
Time Zone.
5. Press SELECT to turn Daylight
Savings on or off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-6
Black plate (6,1)
Instruments and Controls
Clock (Without Date
Display)
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on
page 7‑12 for information about
how to use the menu system.
Setting the Time
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings,
or press H.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings,
or press H.
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
3. Press SELECT to select the
12 hour or 24 hour display
format.
Clock (Color Radio)
The clock is in the center stack
display.
2. Select Set Time.
To set the time:
3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
the highlighted value.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
enter the menu options. Turn the
Menu knob to scroll through the
available setup features. Press
SELECT or press the Time
screen button to display other
options within that feature.
4. Press SELECT to select the
next value.
5. To save the time and return to
the Time Settings menu, press
the / BACK button at any time
or press SELECT after adjusting
the minutes.
2. Press + or − to decrease or
increase the Hours and Minutes
displayed on the clock.
12/24 HR Format: Press the
12 HR screen button for standard
time; press the 24 HR screen button
for military time.
Day + or Day −: Press the Day +
or Day − display buttons to increase
or decrease the day.
Display: Press Display to turn the
display of the time on the screen on
or off.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlet can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
This outlet is located under the
armrest inside the center console
storage.
The outlet is powered when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY, or until the driver
door is opened within 10 minutes of
turning off the vehicle. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑25.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Instruments and Controls
Open the protective cover to use
the accessory power outlet.
Power Outlet 110 Volt Alternating
Current
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and
could overload vehicle or adapter
fuses. If there is a problem, see
your dealer.
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in
electrical equipment with a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑60.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
An indicator light on the outlet
comes on when in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, equipment requiring less
5-7
than 150 watts is plugged into the
outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
The indicator light on the outlet will
not turn on if the plug is not fully
seated.
If you try to connect equipment
using more than 150 watts or a
system fault is detected, the
equipment may operate for a
short period and turn itself off.
A protection circuit shuts off the
power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug
the item and plug it back in or turn
the Remote Accessory Power (RAP)
off and then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑25. Prolonged usage of the
power outlet at the maximum load of
150 watts may cause the outlet to
overheat and automatically shut
down. The power restarts when
equipment that operates within the
limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-8
Instruments and Controls
The power outlet is not designed for
the following equipment, and may
not work properly if any of the
following is plugged in:
Black plate (8,1)
Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar
5-9
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-10
Black plate (10,1)
Instruments and Controls
English eAssist Shown, Metric eAssist Similar
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
For eAssist vehicles, when
the ignition is in ON/RUN, the
tachometer indicates the vehicle
status. When pointing to AUTO
STOP, the engine is off but the
vehicle is on and can move. The
engine could auto start at any time.
When the indicator points to OFF,
the vehicle is off.
When the engine is on, the
tachometer will indicate the engine’s
revolutions per minute (rpm). The
tachometer may vary by several
hundred rpm’s, during auto stop
mode, when the engine is shutting
off and restarting.
A slight bump may be felt when the
transmission is determining the
most fuel efficient operating range.
Fuel Gauge
Metric
5-11
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-12
Black plate (12,1)
Instruments and Controls
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge indicated the tank was
half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the
tank's capacity to fill the tank.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
English
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There is still
a little fuel left, but the fuel tank
should be filled soon.
The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Driver Efficiency Gauge
For eAssist vehicles, this gauge
assists in driving efficiently and will
vary based on driver input.
To maximize efficiency keep the
gauge pointed in the solid green
zone in the center of the gauge.
The gauge moves to the left when
braking and to the right when
accelerating. When either are done
aggressively, the vehicle is being
driven less efficiently and the gauge
will move further from the center.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
Instruments and Controls
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
In eAssist vehicles, the engine
coolant warning light comes on
when the engine is too hot. See
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑22 in
this section.
English
Metric
5-13
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gauge pointer moves toward
the shaded area, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same
thing as the warning light. It means
that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑19 for more
information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-14
Black plate (14,1)
Instruments and Controls
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind the driver to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle may continue several
times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor the chime
comes on.
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind front passengers to
fasten their safety belt. Then the
light stays on solid until the
belt is buckled.
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor(s),
passenger sensing system, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring, and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑21.
This cycle continues several times
if the front passenger remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
If the front passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started.
Then the light goes out.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
Instruments and Controls
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑27 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
5-15
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF for several
seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start,
if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the
system check. Then, after several
more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF to let you
know the status of the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag is allowed
to inflate.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system.
See your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑14 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-16
Black plate (16,1)
Instruments and Controls
Charging System Light
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, to produce
a cleaner environment. This light
comes on when the vehicle is
placed in ON/RUN for key access or
Service Only Mode for keyless
access, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 9‑16 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
more information.
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the dealer technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
Instruments and Controls
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park. Turn the
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
and restart the engine. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
5-17
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑52. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-18
Black plate (18,1)
Instruments and Controls
Check that good quality fuel is
used. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
Some local governments may have
programs to inspect the on-vehicle
emission control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system test
equipment is connected to the
vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑49.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
Instruments and Controls
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have your brake
system inspected right away.
If the vehicle has antilock brakes,
this light should come on when the
vehicle is placed in START. If it does
not, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal may be harder to push or
it can go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. Try turning off
and restarting the vehicle one or two
times. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on page 5‑20 and
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑94.
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
5-19
Electric Parking Brake
Light
English
Metric
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake (EPB), the parking
brake status light comes on when
the parking brake is applied. If the
light continues flashing after the
parking brake is released, or while
driving, there is a problem with the
Electric Parking Brake system.
A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
message may also display in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑33 for more information.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-20
Black plate (20,1)
Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake (EPB), the parking
brake warning light should come on
briefly when ignition is placed in ON/
RUN. If it does not come on, then
have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn if there is a problem.
If this light comes on, there is a
problem with a system on the
vehicle that is causing the parking
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer as
soon as possible. See Parking
Brake on page 9‑34 for more
information.
For vehicles with the uplevel or
eAssist cluster, this telltale
displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) screen.
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving,
the vehicle needs service. A chime
may also sound when the light
comes on steady.
If the ABS light is the only light on,
the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
functioning.
If both the ABS and the brake
system warning light are on, the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑19.
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑33 for all brake related
DIC messages.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
Instruments and Controls
Traction Off Light
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
This light comes on when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheel spin is not limited.
If StabiliTrak is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
system and the warning light
turns off.
This light also comes on and the
system turns off if there is a problem
with the traction control system.
If the light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time while
the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
5-21
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
The Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light is on while certain DIC
messages display, this indicates
that the TCS and StabiliTrak
systems are not working or are
disabled.
If the light is on and not flashing,
the TCS and potentially the
StabiliTrak system have been
disabled.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-22
Black plate (22,1)
Instruments and Controls
Check the DIC messages to
determine which feature(s) is no
longer functioning and whether it is
because of the driver turning off the
feature(s), or because the system is
not working properly and the vehicle
requires service.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is
not limited. If the StabiliTrak system
is disabled, the system does not aid
in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working. Check the DIC messages
for details to determine which
system is working. If the LOW
TRACTION message appears, the
system is limiting wheel spin. If a
message appears in the DIC, the
system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑37 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
more information.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑37 for more information
on the messages associated with
this light.
For vehicles with an uplevel cluster,
this light comes on in the Driver
information Center (DIC).
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑19. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑19
for more information.
For eAssist vehicles, this light
comes on briefly while starting the
vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally, the indicator
light goes off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (23,1)
Instruments and Controls
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑33 for more information.
Stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the tires to the pressure value
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑51 for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑54 for more
information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
5-23
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
For vehicles with the uplevel or
eAssist cluster, this telltale displays
in the Driver Information Center
(DIC) screen.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-24
Black plate (24,1)
Instruments and Controls
Low Fuel Warning Light
Security Light
High-Beam On Light
This light, below the fuel gauge,
comes on briefly when the engine
is started.
The immobilizer light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light then goes off.
This light also comes on when the
fuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel
is added the light should go off.
If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
For vehicles with an uplevel or
eAssist cluster, this telltale
displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) screen.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) on page 2‑14 or
Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑15 for more
information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (25,1)
Instruments and Controls
Front Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
5-25
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
For vehicles with fog lamps, this
light comes on when the fog lamps
are on.
This light is white whenever the
cruise control is set and turns green
when the cruise control is active.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑40 for more
information.
Taillamp Indicator Light
This light comes on when the
taillamps are in use.
For vehicles with the uplevel or
eAssist cluster, this telltale will be
shown in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) screen.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays information about the
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑33 for more information. All
messages appear in the DIC display
located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
On some models, the DIC may
show warning lights or indicators in
the top portion of the display. See
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators on page 5‑8 for more
information.
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-26
Black plate (26,1)
Instruments and Controls
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using the
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever
to the left of the steering wheel. The
DIC displays trip, fuel, vehicle
system information, and warning
messages if a system problem is
detected.
The bottom of the DIC display
shows what position the shift lever
is in, the odometer, and the direction
the vehicle is driving.
In cold weather the DIC display may
change slowly. This is normal and
will move more quickly as the
vehicle's interior temperature rises.
DIC Buttons
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Trip/Fuel Information
Menu is displayed. Use w x to
scroll through the following menu
items:
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
the menu item when it is
displayed.
B.
w x (Thumbwheel): Use to
scroll through the items in each
menu. A small marker will move
across the bottom of the page
as you scroll through the items.
This shows where each page is
in the menu.
C. MENU: Press to get to the Trip/
Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
Digital Speedometer
Trip 1
Trip 2
Power Flow Gauge
(eAssist Only)
Fuel Range
Average Fuel Economy/
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average Vehicle Speed
Timer
Navigation
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (27,1)
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Digital Speedometer
Fuel Range
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
This display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy
display shows the current fuel
economy in liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number reflects only the
fuel economy that the vehicle has
right now and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. Unlike
average economy, this display
cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy/
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average Vehicle Speed
Trip 1 and Trip 2
This display shows the current
distance traveled, in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
the last reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing SET/CLR while the
trip odometer display is showing.
Power Flow Gauge (eAssist Only)
This display shows the operating
mode of the eAssist system and the
high voltage battery charge level.
The animation indicates the
direction of energy flow.
On some models, this display
shows Average Fuel Economy.
On other models, this display shows
both Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy.
The Average Fuel Economy display
shows the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). This
number is calculated based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. The fuel economy can be
reset by pressing SET/CLR while
the Average Fuel Economy display
is showing.
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this value. The average
speed can be reset by pressing
SET/CLR while the Average Vehicle
Speed display is showing.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-28
Black plate (28,1)
Instruments and Controls
Timer
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press SET/CLR
while Timer is displayed. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the
ignition is off. Time will continue to
be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
which the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press SET/CLR
briefly while Timer is displayed. To
reset the timer to zero, press and
hold SET/CLR.
Navigation
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1 or the navigation manual,
if the vehicle has navigation, for
more information.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Vehicle Information Menu
is displayed. Use w x to scroll
through the following menu items:
Unit
Tire Pressure
Jump Start (eAssist Only)
Remaining Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Unit
Move w x to switch between
metric or US when the Unit display
is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
the setting. This will change the
displays on the cluster and DIC to
either metric or English (US)
measurements.
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle with
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either kilopascal (kPa) or pounds
per square inch (psi). See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑53 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑54 for
more information.
Jump Start (eAssist Only)
This display allows for on-board
jump starting of the vehicle. See
“Jump Starting (On-board with
eAssist Only)” for more information.
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate of
the oil's remaining useful life.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑35.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (29,1)
Instruments and Controls
The oil should be changed as soon
as possible. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9. In addition to the engine
oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 for more information.
Remember, the Oil Life display must
be reset after each oil change. It will
not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the Oil Life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, press SET/
CLR while the Oil Life display is
active. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 10‑12.
Battery Voltage
This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read
Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
vehicle's charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the
battery. The battery voltage can
fluctuate while viewing this
information on the DIC. This is
normal. See Charging System Light
on page 5‑16 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the DIC will
display a message
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Compass on
page 5‑4 for more information.
5-29
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{ WARNING
If the HUD image is too bright or
too high in your field of view, it
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
HUD image dim and placed low in
your field of view.
For vehicles with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), some information
concerning the operation of the
vehicle is projected onto the
windshield. This includes the
speedometer reading, rpm reading,
transmission position, outside air
temperature, compass heading, and
a brief display of the current radio
station, including XM information or
CD track. It will also display
turn-by-turn navigation information if
the vehicle has a navigation radio.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-30
Black plate (30,1)
Instruments and Controls
The following indicator lights come
on in the instrument panel when
activated and also appear on
the HUD:
The images are projected through
the HUD lens located on the driver
side of the instrument panel.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD
image as a parking aid, you may
misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use
the HUD image as a parking aid.
The HUD information can be
displayed in one of three languages,
English, French, or Spanish. The
speedometer reading and other
numerical values can be displayed
in either English or metric units.
The language selection is changed
through the radio and the units of
measurement is changed through
the trip computer in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD/
MEM) on page 7‑17 or AM-FM
Radio (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19 and
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
The HUD temporarily displays some
vehicle warnings, such as CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE and FUEL
LEVEL LOW when these messages
are on the DIC trip computer.
HUD Display on the Vehicle
Windshield
The HUD information appears as an
image focused out toward the front
of the vehicle.
When the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ON/RUN/START
position, HUD will display an
introductory message for a short
time, until the HUD is ready.
The HUD also displays the following
messages on vehicles with these
systems, when they are active:
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
When the HUD is on, the
speedometer reading is continually
displayed. The current radio station
or CD track number will display for a
short period of time after the radio
or CD track status changes. This
happens whenever radio information
is changed.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (31,1)
Instruments and Controls
The speedometer size is reduced
when radio, CD information,
warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation
information are displayed on
the HUD.
Use the following settings to adjust
the HUD.
To adjust the HUD image so that
items are properly displayed, do the
following:
1. Adjust the driver seat to a
comfortable position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the HUD controls.
The three formats are as follows:
OFF: To turn HUD off, turn the
HUD dimming knob fully
counterclockwise until the
HUD display turns off.
Brightness: Turn the dimming knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the display.
The HUD control is located to the
left of the steering wheel.
5-31
English Shown, Metric Similar
« (Up) or ª (Down): Press the
up or down arrows to center the
HUD image in your view. The HUD
image can only be adjusted up and
down, not side to side.
Format One: This display gives the
speedometer reading (in English or
metric units), turn signal indication,
high‐beam indication, transmission
positions, outside air temperature,
and compass heading.
PAGE: Press to select the display
formats. Release the PAGE button
when the format number with the
desired display is shown on the
HUD. If vehicle messages are
displayed, pressing PAGE may
clear the message.
English Shown, Metric Similar
Format Two: This display includes
the information in Format One
without the transmission
information, the outside air
temperature, and compass heading.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-32
Black plate (32,1)
Instruments and Controls
Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film
that could reduce the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
English Shown, Metric Similar
Format Three: This display
includes much of the information in
Format One along with a circular
tachometer, but without outside air
temperature and compass heading.
All formats will show the turn-by-turn
navigation information and provide
details about the next driving
maneuver to be made. When you
near your next maneuver, the HUD
will display a distance bar that will
empty the closer you get to your
maneuver. All navigation information
is provided to the HUD by the
navigation radio or OnStar service,
for vehicles that have these
features.
English Shown, Metric Similar
The HUD image displayed on the
windshield will automatically dim
and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting. However, the
HUD brightness control can still be
adjusted as needed.
The HUD image can temporarily
light up depending on the angle
and position of the sunlight on the
HUD display. This is normal and will
change when the angle of the
sunlight on the HUD display
changes.
Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,
clean cloth that has household glass
cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the lens
because the cleaner could leak into
the unit.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (33,1)
Instruments and Controls
If You Cannot See the HUD
Image When the Ignition Is On
Is anything covering the
HUD lens?
Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
enough?
Is the HUD image adjusted to
the proper height?
Are you wearing polarized
sunglasses?
Still no HUD image? Check the
fuse in the instrument panel fuse
block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 10‑40.
If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
Is the HUD image too bright?
Are the windshield and HUD
lens clean?
If the HUD image is not correct,
contact your dealer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is
part of the HUD system.
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the
DIC indicate the status of the
vehicle or some action that may be
needed to correct a condition.
Multiple messages may display
one after the other.
The messages that do not require
immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing SET/CLR. The messages
that require immediate action cannot
be cleared until that action is
performed. All messages should be
taken seriously and clearing the
messages does not correct the
problem.
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
5-33
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
LOW BATTERY
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑25 for more information.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
Brake System Messages
BRAKE FLUID LOW
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 10‑23.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-34
Black plate (34,1)
Instruments and Controls
STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the electric
parking brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Parking Brake
on page 9‑34 for more information.
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
Door Ajar Messages
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the electric
parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 9‑34 for more information.
Take the vehicle to your dealer.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
Compass Messages
This message is displayed if the
electric parking brake is on while the
vehicle is in motion. Release it
before you attempt to drive. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑34 for
more information.
CAL
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
This message may be displayed
when there is a problem with the
brake boost assist system. When
this message is displayed, the brake
boost assist motor might be heard
operating and you might notice
pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal under these
conditions. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 5‑4.
–––
Cruise Control Messages
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays when the
cruise control is set and shows the
speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑40 for more
information.
This message will display when the
driver door is open. Close the door
completely.
HOOD OPEN
This message will display when the
hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the
driver side rear door is open. Close
the door completely.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the
front passenger door is open. Close
the door completely.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the
passenger side rear door is open.
Close the door completely.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (35,1)
Instruments and Controls
TRUNK OPEN
This message will display when the
trunk is open. Close the trunk
completely.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
ENGINE TEMP
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns
back on. You can continue to
drive the vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
COOLANT
This message will display if the
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
on page 10‑16.
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
ENGINE OVERHEATED —
STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
5-35
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9 and Maintenance
Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
information.
ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check the
oil level. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-36
Black plate (36,1)
Instruments and Controls
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
ENGINE
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
Engine Power Messages
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is
no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced.
Key and Lock Messages
NO REMOTE DETECTED
This message displays when the
transmitter battery is weak on
vehicles with keyless access. See
“Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
be replaced.
Lamp Messages
AFL (Adaptive Forward
Lighting) LAMPS NEED
SERVICE
This message displays when the
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer. See
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
page 6‑4 for more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (37,1)
Instruments and Controls
Object Detection System
Messages
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays when the
park assist system has been turned
off or when there is a temporary
condition causing the system to be
disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 9‑42.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system.
Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 9‑42 for more information.
See your dealer for service.
SERVICE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If this message appears, both SBZA
displays will remain on indicating
there is a problem with the SBZA
system. If these displays remain on
after continued driving, the system
needs service. Take the vehicle to
your dealer.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
This message indicates that the
driver has turned the system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
UNAVAILABLE
This message indicates that the
SBZA system is disabled because
the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in the blind zone.
The sensor may be blocked by mud,
dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This
message may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. The
vehicle does not need service. For
cleaning, see Exterior Care on
page 10‑98.
5-37
Ride Control System
Messages
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
This message displays when the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System has
been turned off. See All-Wheel
Drive on page 9‑32.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
SYSTEM
This message displays when there
is a problem with the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) System. See your
dealer for service.
SERVICE REAR AXLE
This message displays when there
is a problem with the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) System. See your
dealer for service.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-38
Black plate (38,1)
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer
for service.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there is a
problem with the StabiliTrak system.
If this message appears, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine
for at least 15 seconds; then start
the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a
problem. See your dealer for
service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
SPORT MODE ON
This message displays when using
the selective ride control. See
Selective Ride Control on page 9‑39
for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Anti-theft Alarm System
Messages
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Starting the Vehicle
Messages
JUMP START ACTIVE WAIT TO
START
This message displays while
performing an on-board jump start
of the vehicle. See “Jump Starting
(On-board with eAssist Only)” for
more information.
JUMP START COMPLETE
ATTEMPT START
This message displays while
performing an on-board jump start
of the vehicle. See “Jump Starting
(On-board with eAssist Only)” for
more information.
JUMP START DISABLED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL
This message displays if there is a
problem with the on-board jump
start system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (39,1)
Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages
TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low.
The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑23.
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 10‑44, Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑51.
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the SET/CLR button.
The DIC also shows the tire
pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑54 for more information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑54 for more information.
Transmission Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer.
5-39
SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the ignition or from the vehicle if the
vehicle is not in P (Park).
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-40
Black plate (40,1)
Instruments and Controls
Window Messages
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER
WINDOW
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you will
need to reprogram each front
window for the express-up feature to
work. See Power Windows on
page 2‑19 for more information.
OPEN, THEN CLOSE
PASSENGER WINDOW
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you will
need to reprogram each front
window for the express-up feature to
work. See Power Windows on
page 2‑19 for more information.
Vehicle
Personalization
The audio system controls are used
to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
access the Configuration
Settings menu.
Menu Knob: Turn to scroll through
the menus.
SELECT: Press to enter the menus
and select menu items.
/ BACK:
Press to exit or move
backward in a menu.
Entering the Personalization
Menus
1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu.
The following list of menu items may
be available:
Climate and Air Quality
Comfort and Convenience
Collision/Detection Systems
Language
Lighting
Power Door Locks
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Return to Factory Settings
Turn the Menu knob to highlight the
menu. Press SELECT to select it.
Each of the menus is detailed in the
following information.
Climate and Air Quality
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following may be
displayed:
2. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
Vehicle Settings.
Auto Fan Speed
Air Quality Sensor
3. Press SELECT to select the
Vehicle Settings menu.
Auto Heated Seats
Air Conditioning Mode
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (41,1)
Instruments and Controls
Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
Remote Start Cooled Seats
Auto Defog
Auto Rear Defog
Auto Fan Speed
This will allow you to select the
automatic fan speed. It can be
adjusted to run lower or higher than
normal.
Press SELECT when Auto Fan
Speed is highlighted to open the
menu. Turn the Menu knob to
highlight High, Medium, or Low.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move
to the last menu.
Air Quality Sensor
This will allow you to select whether
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
the dual zone climate control will
have this option.
Press SELECT when Air Quality
Sensor is highlighted to open the
menu. Turn the Menu knob to
highlight High or Low. Press
SELECT to confirm the selection.
Press / BACK to move to the
last menu.
Auto Heated Seats
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will automatically activate
heated seats at the level required by
the interior temperature. The auto
heated seats can be turned off by
using the heated seat buttons on
the climate control panel.
Press SELECT when Auto Heated
Seats is highlighted to open the
menu. Turn the Menu knob to
highlight On or Off. Press SELECT
to confirm the selection. Press /
BACK to move to the last menu.
Air Conditioning Mode
This allows selection of automatic
start of the air conditioning upon
vehicle start. Selecting On indicates
the air conditioning will be on when
5-41
the vehicle is started. Selecting Off
turns the air conditioning off each
time the vehicle is started. Last
Setting will resume the last setting
when the vehicle was shut off.
Press SELECT when Air
Conditioning Mode is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the Menu knob
to highlight Off, On, or Last Setting.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the heated seats on
when using remote start on
cold days.
Press SELECT when Remote Start
Auto Heated Seats is highlighted.
Turn the Menu knob to select On or
Off. Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-42
Black plate (42,1)
Instruments and Controls
Remote Start Cooled Seats
Auto Rear Defog
If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the cooled seats on
when using remote start on
warm days.
If equipped, this will allow you to
turn the auto rear defog on or off.
This feature will automatically turn
on the rear defogger when it is
cold outside.
Press SELECT when Remote Start
Cooled Seats is highlighted. Turn
the Menu knob to select On or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Auto Defog
This will allow you to turn the auto
defog on or off. Only vehicles with
the dual zone climate control will
have this option.
Press SELECT when Auto Defog is
highlighted to open the menu. Turn
the Menu knob to highlight On or
Off. Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Press SELECT when Auto Rear
Defog is highlighted to open the
menu. Turn the Menu knob to
highlight On or Off. Press SELECT
to confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
Chime Volume
Driver Seat Easy Exit
Park Tilt Mirrors
Chime Volume
This allows selection of the chime
volume level.
Press SELECT when Chime Volume
is highlighted. Turn the Menu knob
to select Normal or High. Press
SELECT to confirm the selection.
Press / BACK to move to the
last menu.
Driver Seat Easy Exit
When on, this feature will move the
driver seat rearward upon turning
the ignition off and opening the
driver door. This may be performed
to make it easier to exit the vehicle.
See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” under
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5
for more information.
This allows you to turn the easy exit
seat feature on or off.
Press SELECT when Driver Seat
Easy Exit is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select On or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (43,1)
Instruments and Controls
Park Tilt Mirrors
Collision/Detection Systems
When on, both the driver and
passenger mirrors will tilt downward
when the vehicle is shifted to
R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
the ground near the rear wheels.
They will return to their previous
driving position when the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse), the
ignition is turned to OFF, or the
vehicle is left in R (Reverse). See
Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 for
more information.
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following will
be displayed:
This allows you to turn the park tilt
mirrors feature on or off.
Press SELECT when Park Tilt
Mirrors is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select Driver &
Passenger or Off. Press SELECT to
confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
Side Blind Zone Alert System
Side Blind Zone Alert System
If equipped, this feature allows the
Side Blind Zone Alert System
feature to be turned on or off.
Press SELECT when Side Blind
Zone Alert System is highlighted.
Turn the Menu knob to select On or
Off. Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Language
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
English
French
Spanish
5-43
Turn the Menu knob to select the
language. Press SELECT to confirm
the selection. Press / BACK to
move to the last menu.
Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
Exit Lighting
This allows selection of how long
the exterior lamps stay on when
leaving the vehicle and it is
dark outside.
Press SELECT when Exit Lighting is
highlighted. Turn the Menu knob to
select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,
or 2 Minutes. Press SELECT to
confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-44
Black plate (44,1)
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off. The vehicle
locator lights come on when
unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter.
Press SELECT when Vehicle
Locator Lights is highlighted. Turn
the Menu knob to select On or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Power Door Locks
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Delayed Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out menu
will be available and the door will
lock as programmed through
this menu.
Press SELECT when Unlocked
Door Anti Lock Out is highlighted.
Turn the Menu knob to select On or
Off. Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Delayed Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press SELECT when Auto Door
Unlock is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select All Doors,
Driver Door, or Off. Press SELECT
to confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
When on, this feature will delay the
locking of the doors until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use.
Pressing either the power lock
button or Q on the RKE transmitter
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock
all of the doors.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Press SELECT when Delayed Door
Lock is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select On or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move
to the last menu.
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
Locking Feedback
Door Unlock Options
Remote Recall
Passive Entry
Remote Left In Vehicle
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (45,1)
Instruments and Controls
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
Door Unlock Options
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter.
Press SELECT when Unlock
Feedback (Lights) is highlighted.
Turn the Menu knob to select On or
Off. Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move to
the last menu.
Press SELECT when Door Unlock
Options is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select All Doors or
Driver Door Only. When set to
Driver Door Only, the driver door will
unlock the first time the unlock
button is pressed and all doors will
unlock when the button is pressed a
second time. When set to All Doors,
all of the doors will unlock at the first
press of K. Press SELECT to
confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
Locking Feedback
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Press SELECT when Locking
Feedback is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select Lights and
Horn, Lights Only, Horn Only, or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move
to the last menu.
Remote Recall
When on, this feature will recall the
current driver's last seat and outside
mirror positions upon unlocking the
driver door with the RKE, and
opening that door. The current driver
is identified when the RKE is used
to unlock the driver door. If keyless
access equipped, the recall will
5-45
occur upon opening the driver door.
See “Memory Remote Recall” under
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5
for more information.
This allows the Remote Recall
feature to be turned on or off.
Remote Recall is when the
memorized settings will be recalled
as you unlock and enter the vehicle.
Press SELECT when Remote Recall
is highlighted. Turn the Menu knob
to select On or Off. Press SELECT
to confirm the selection. Press /
BACK to move to the last menu.
Passive Entry
This allows the Passive Entry
feature to be turned on or off.
Press SELECT when Passive Entry
is highlighted. Turn the Menu knob
to select On or Off. Press SELECT
to confirm the selection. Press
/ BACK to move to the last menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-46
Black plate (46,1)
Instruments and Controls
Remote Left In Vehicle
This allows the Remote Left In
Vehicle reminder feature to be
turned on or off. If on, the horn will
chirp if a remote is left in the
vehicle.
Press SELECT when Remote Left In
Vehicle is highlighted. Turn the
Menu knob to select On or Off.
Press SELECT to confirm the
selection. Press / BACK to move
to the last menu.
Universal Remote
System
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Do not use the Universal Remote
system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1,1982.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Return to Factory Settings
Select Return to Factory Settings to
return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the Menu knob to
select Yes or No. Press SELECT to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
If the vehicle has this feature, you
will see these buttons with one LED
indicator next to them in the
overhead console.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist with programming
the Universal Remote system.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal
Remote system programming. It is
also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Remote system buttons
be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons” later in this
section.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (47,1)
Instruments and Controls
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate being
programmed.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in the hand-held
transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal
Remote System
For questions or help programming
the Universal Remote system, call
1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of the hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
3 in) away from the Universal
Remote system buttons while
keeping the indicator light in
view. The hand-held transmitter
was supplied by the
manufacturer of the garage door
opener receiver
(motor-head unit).
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
transmitter button and one of the
three Universal Remote system
buttons to be used to operate
the garage door. Do not release
the Universal Remote system
button or the hand-held
transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a
slowly to a rapidly flashing light.
You now may release both
buttons.
5-47
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly trained Universal
Remote system button (the
button selected in Step 2) while
observing the indicator light and
garage door activation.
If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage
door starts to move when
the Universal Remote
system button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 4 through 6.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-48
Black plate (48,1)
Instruments and Controls
If the Universal Remote
system indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds,
then turns to a constant
light and the garage door
does not move, continue
with programming Steps 4
through 6.
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining Steps 4
through 6.
“Learn” or “Smart” Button
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
been completed, locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button inside
the garage on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color of the
button may vary by
manufacturer.
5. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
pressing this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Remote system button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
door, and then release it. If the
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press and
hold the same button a second
time for two seconds, and then
release it. Again, if the door
does not move or the garage
door lamp does not flash, press
and hold the same button a
third time for two seconds, and
then release.
The Universal Remote system
should now activate the
garage door.
To program the remaining two
Universal Remote system buttons,
begin with Step 1 of “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
enough for the Universal Remote
system to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (49,1)
Instruments and Controls
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming the
Universal Remote System”
procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 2 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Remote system button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The
Universal Remote system indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” to complete.
Universal Remote System
Operation
Using the Universal Remote
System
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote system button for
at least half of a second. The
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Remote
System Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Remote system
device:
1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash.
This should take about
10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
5-49
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote System
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote system buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Remote system
button. Do not release
the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
“Programming the Universal
Remote System.”
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com. You may
also call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer
Assistance Offices (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑4 or Customer
Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
page 13‑5.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
5-50
Black plate (50,1)
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-7
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Load Management . . . .
Battery Power Protection . . . . . .
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-1
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
6-2
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is located
on the instrument panel on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
Turn the control to the following
positions:
O (Off):
Black plate (2,1)
Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Turn to off again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
; (Parking Lamps):
A warning chime sounds if the driver
door is opened while the ignition is
off and the exterior lamps are on.
Turns on
the parking lamps together with
the following:
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
following:
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Parking Lamps
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you and
release, to turn the high beams on.
To return to low beams, push the
lever again or pull it toward you
and release.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high‐beam headlamps are on.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Lighting
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever toward
you, and release.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system turns on the
low-beam headlamps at a
reduced brightness.
For vehicles with
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the dedicated DRL will
come on when all of the following
conditions are met:
The engine is running.
The exterior lamp band is
in AUTO.
The light sensor determines it
is daytime.
6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System
When the exterior lamp control is
set to AUTO and it is dark enough
outside, the headlamps come on
automatically.
When the DRL are on, the
low-beam headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
instrument panel lights, and other
lamps will not be on.
The DRL turn off when the
headlamps are turned to O or
the ignition is off.
There is a light sensor located on
top of the instrument panel. Do not
cover the sensor; otherwise the
headlamps will come on when they
are not needed.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
6-4
Black plate (4,1)
Lighting
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the
ignition is off.
driving a short distance is required
to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑2.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Hazard Warning Flashers
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
The Adaptive Forward Lighting
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps
horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. To enable
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch to
the AUTO position. Moving the
switch out of the AUTO position
deactivates the system.
AFL operates when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
(2 mph). AFL does not operate
when the transmission is in
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately
operable after starting the vehicle;
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on
and off. Press again to turn the
flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers turn on
automatically if the airbags deploy.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Lighting
The turn and lane‐change signal
can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its
original position.
Fog Lamps
To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition
and the headlamps or parking lamps
must be on.
If the fog lamps are turned on while
the exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlamps
come on automatically.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑36.
6-5
For vehicles with fog lamps,
the button is located on the
exterior lamp control, left of the
steering wheel.
# : Press to turn on or off. An
indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on when the
fog lamps are on.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
6-6
Black plate (6,1)
Lighting
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
There are front and rear reading
lamps.
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The interior lamps control located in
the overhead console controls both
the front and rear interior lamps.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lighting and steering wheel
controls can be adjusted.
To operate:
D (Instrument Panel
when any door is opened.
Illumination) : Move and hold the
thumbwheel up or down to brighten
or dim the lights.
Reading Lamps
( (Off): Turns the lamps off.
H (Door): Turns the lamps on
' (On): Keeps the lamps on all
the time.
The interior lamps turn on
automatically if the airbags are
deployed.
The front reading lamps are located
in the overhead console.
# or$ : Press to turn each lamp
on or off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Lighting
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The rear reading lamps are located
in the headliner.
Sun Visor Lamps
This lamp turns on when the cover
is opened.
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, back‐up lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) K button is
pressed, or when the door handle is
pulled on a keyless access vehicle.
See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 9‑16 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18.
After about 30 seconds the exterior
lamps turn off, then the dome lamps
and remaining interior lights dim to
off. Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
pressing the RKE Q button.
This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
6-7
Exit Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, back‐up lamps, and license
plate lamps come on at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The dome lamps also come on
when the key is removed from the
ignition. The exterior lights and
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
For vehicles with keyless access,
the exterior lights and dome lamps
automatically turn on when a door is
opened after the ignition is turned
off. See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9‑16 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑18.
The exterior lights turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamps control off.
This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
6-8
Black plate (8,1)
Lighting
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all of the
power needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a DIC message might
be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays, it
is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
Battery Power Protection
The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
If the exterior lamps or any interior
light is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown
protection system automatically
turns the lamp off after about
10 minutes.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Infotainment System
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-4
Overview (Radio with CD/
DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Radio
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/
DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD
and Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-26
7-1
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Storage
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26
7-29
7-32
7-35
7-38
7-41
7-44
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-2
Black plate (2,1)
Infotainment System
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth (UHP
Mexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-57
7-59
7-64
7-70
Trademarks and License
Agreements
Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Introduction
Infotainment
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to
many audio and non‐audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑3.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Infotainment System
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑25 for more
information.
7-3
Navigation System
Theft-Deterrent Feature
For vehicles with a navigation
system, see the separate navigation
manual.
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to the
infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
different vehicle.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-4
Black plate (4,1)
Infotainment System
Overview (Radio with CD)
A. VOL/
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
C. Buttons 1 to 6
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
D. INFO
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
E. TUNE
Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
CD: Selects tracks.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Infotainment System
F.
CD/AUX
G.
H.
Selects the CD player or
an external audio source.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
CD: Select the previous
track or rewinds within
a track.
RADIO/BAND
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
K. Menu Knob
I.
J.
Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
L.
Opens menus, highlights
menu items, or sets
numeric values while in
a menu.
SELECT
Selects menu items.
M. CONFIG
Radio: Seeks the next
station.
CD: Select the next track
or fast forwards within
a track.
Opens the Settings menu.
N.
O.
/ BACK
Menu: Moves one
level back.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
P.
Opens the Clock menu.
TONE
Q.
7-5
Opens the Tone menu.
Opens the Phone
main menu.
Mutes the audio system.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-6
Black plate (6,1)
Infotainment System
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
A. VOL/
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
C.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
Buttons 1 to 6
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and
playlists.
D. INFO
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Infotainment System
E. TUNE/
F.
Manually selects radio
stations and pauses
time shifted content.
CD/DVD: Select tracks,
pauses playback, and
stops playback.
MEM: Select tracks and
pauses playback.
RADIO/BAND
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
G.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within
a track.
H.
REC
DEL
K.
MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within
a track.
I.
J.
AUX: Records content
from audio CDs, MP3/
WMA CDs, and USB mass
storage devices.
L.
MEM: Deletes the current
track from MEM.
Radio: Seeks the next
station.
CD: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
MEM: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
7-7
SELECT
Selects menu items.
M. Menu Knob
Opens menus, highlights
menu items, or sets
numeric values while
in a menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-8
N.
Infotainment System
/ BACK
Menu: Moves one
level back.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
O. TONE
P.
Black plate (8,1)
Opens the Tone menu.
Q. CONFIG
R.
Overview (Radio with
CD and Touchscreen)
Infotainment System Overview
Opens the Phone
main menu.
Mutes the audio system.
S. MEM/DVD/AUX
Opens the Clock menu.
Opens the Settings menu.
Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxiliary audio
source.
The infotainment system is
controlled by using the Menu knob,
SELECT button, preset buttons, and
other buttons on the faceplate.
The Menu knob can be turned and
the SELECT button pressed to
complete any of the highlighted
screen functions.
The preset buttons can be pressed
to select the appropriate screen
button function as shown on the
display.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Infotainment System
A. VOL/
O (Power/Volume)
B. FAV (Favorites)
C. Buttons 1 to 6
D. INFO
E. TUNE/
H.
F (Home Page)
X (Eject)
I.
CD Slot
J.
F.
G.
K. SOURCE
L.
Menu Knob
M. SELECT
N. CONFIG
O.
P.
/ BACK
Q. TONE
R.
5 (Phone menu)
7-9
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-10
Black plate (10,1)
Infotainment System
Config Setup Menu
The Config setup menu is used for
changing the options for the audio,
display, vehicle configuration,
phone, and time.
Press the CONFIG button to
display the Config Menu, then turn
the Menu knob to scroll through the
features. Once the desired feature
displays, press the Menu knob
to display more options within
that feature.
Languages
The vehicle supports English,
French (Canadian), and Spanish.
The default language is English.
Turn the Menu knob to highlight the
language. Press SELECT to change
the display language.
English and Metric Unit
Conversion
Menu Knob:
To change the display units between
English and metric units. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25 for more information.
Highlight a menu option.
Select a value.
Menu System
Exit a menu.
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Controls
The Menu knob, SELECT button,
and the / BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
SELECT:
Turn to:
/ BACK :
Press to:
Selecting a Menu Option
Press to:
Enter the menu system.
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.
1. Turn the Menu knob to move the
highlighted bar.
2. Press SELECT to select the
highlighted option.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
Infotainment System
7-11
Submenus
Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
1. Turn the Menu knob to change
the current value of the setting.
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the character.
2. Press SELECT to confirm the
setting.
2. Press SELECT to select the
character.
Turning a Function On or Off
Press / BACK to delete the last
character in the sequence or press
and hold to delete the entire
character sequence.
Activating a Setting
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the setting.
2. Press SELECT to activate the
setting.
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the function.
2. Press SELECT to turn the
function on or off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-12
Black plate (12,1)
Infotainment System
Storing Radio Station Presets
Cleaning the Display
Turning the System On or Off
Up to 36 preset stations can
be stored. AM, FM, and XM™
(if equipped) can be mixed.
To store presets:
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces
could scratch the glass. Use only
a soft cloth and do not spray
cleaner directly on the system as
it could affect the mechanical
parts.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.
1. Press VOL/
system on.
O to turn the
2. Select the SOURCE button.
3. Press g or l on the faceplate
or turn and press SELECT to
select a station.
4. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons for more than one and a
half seconds.
5. Repeat the steps for each
preset.
To change the number of preset
pages, see AM-FM Radio (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 or
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19 for
more information.
Do not apply spray cleaner directly
to the system, the cleaner could
affect the mechanical parts.
Do not wipe the panel with a hard
cloth or use a volatile liquid such as
paint thinner, it could scratch the
surface or erase the characters on
the buttons.
Operation
Controls
The infotainment system is
operated by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus shown
on the display, and steering wheel
controls, if equipped.
Automatic Switch‐Off
If the infotainment system has
been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off
automatically after 10 minutes.
Volume Control
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to
adjust the volume.
5 (Phone/Mute): For vehicles
with OnStar®, press and hold 5 to
mute the infotainment system.
Press and hold 5 again, or turn
the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
For vehicles without OnStar®,
press 5 to mute the infotainment
system. Press 5 again, or turn the
VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
Infotainment System
Menu System
/ BACK:
Controls
Press to:
The Menu knob, SELECT button,
and / BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
Exit a menu.
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
Menu Knob:
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Turn to:
Enter the menu system.
Highlight a menu option.
Select a value.
Selecting a Menu Option
7-13
Submenus
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Activating a Setting
SELECT:
Press to:
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.
1. Turn the Menu knob to move the
highlighted bar.
2. Press SELECT to select the
highlighted option.
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the setting.
2. Press SELECT to activate the
setting.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-14
Black plate (14,1)
Infotainment System
Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
3. Press and hold SELECT until
the value changes to 0.
Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
1. Turn the Menu knob to change
the current value of the setting.
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the character.
2. Press SELECT to confirm the
setting.
2. Press SELECT to select the
character.
Turning a Function On or Off
Press the / BACK button to delete
the last character in the sequence
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
1. Press the TONE button.
Audio Settings
3. Select the value.
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the function.
2. Press SELECT to turn the
function on or off.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
Infotainment System
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
3. Select the setting.
Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
The DSP settings for the radio with
CD/DVD and MEM are:
2.0 normal ‐ Select this setting
to adjust the audio for stereo
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for the driver seat
first, with the front passenger
second.
hk surround ‐ Select to enable
hk surround. This produces a
true 6.1 matrix surround from
any two channel digital source.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Settings
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
For vehicles with DSP, it is used to
provide a choice of different
listening experiences.
The DSP settings for the radio with
CD are:
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles with an equalizer:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select EQ.
normal ‐ Select this setting to
adjust the audio for stereo
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for the driver seat
first, with the front passenger
second.
hk surround ‐ Select to enable
hk surround. This produces a
true 6.1 matrix surround from
any two channel digital source.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.
7-15
To adjust the DSP settings:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select DSP.
3. Select the setting.
Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-16
Black plate (16,1)
Infotainment System
System Settings
Auto Volume
Maximum Startup Volume
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
The auto volume feature
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The maximum volume played when
the radio with CD is first turned on
can be set.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the / BACK button to
go back to the System
Configuration menu.
4. Select the setting.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the / BACK button to
go back to the System
Configuration menu.
5. Press the / BACK button to
go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
Infotainment System
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
Radio
AM-FM Radio (Radio with
CD/DVD/MEM)
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
Menu Knob: Turn to navigate the
available menus.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
g/l:
Press to search for
stations.
FAV: Press to open the favorites
list and select the favorites page.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
RDS (Radio Data System)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact
the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Radio Menus
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
Turn the Menu knob to open the
main radio menu for that band.
7-17
Selecting a Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.
The last station that was playing
starts playing again.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press g or l to
automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
If the radio station is known:
Press and hold g or l until the
station on the display is reached,
then release the button.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-18
Black plate (18,1)
Infotainment System
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
Briefly press g or l to
automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
3. Select the station.
Updating Station & Category Lists
Category Lists
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received:
Manual Tuning
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the
RDS stations sorted by program
type in the FM category list.
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the display.
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
To cancel the station search,
press SELECT.
Favorites List
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
3. Select the station.
Station Lists
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
receivable stations in the current
reception area are displayed. If a
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search
is done.
3. Select the programming type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
4. Select the station.
The category lists are updated
when the station lists are
updated.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will be
completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the
favorite pages.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Storing Stations
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
Infotainment System
Retrieving Stations
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind through the time
shift buffer. Hold l until the end
of the recorded buffer resumes
live playback.
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
Press and release l or g to jump
forward or back 30 seconds in the
time shift buffer.
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
FM/AM content. While listening to
the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered.
When the radio station is changed,
the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. Content from a
previously tuned station is no
longer available.
Press k to pause the radio. The
radio displays the time shift status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content stored in the
buffer and the current pause point.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press k again.
The radio is no longer live, but
played from the time shift buffer.
A status bar displays below the
station number.
If AM/FM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio
station for up to 20 minutes.
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
7-19
If the vehicle is turned back on
within 20 minutes, the radio
resumes playback from the
paused point.
AM-FM Radio (Radio with
CD and Touchscreen)
Playing the Radio
Audio Source Menu
VOL/
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn the radio on or off.
Turn the knob to increase
or decrease the volume.
The volume is adjusted for
the current audio source or
voice prompts.
The steering wheel controls can
also be used to adjust the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2 for more information.
Also, see “Radio Settings” and
“Automatic Volume Control” in
this section.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-20
Black plate (20,1)
Infotainment System
TUNE/ k : Turn to change the
radio station. See “Finding a
Station” following for more
information. Press to play a
CD track.
SOURCE: Press to select the AM,
FM, or XM (if equipped) band.
The audio sources can also be
changed by using the steering
wheel controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑2 for more
information.
Tone Menu
To access the sound menu, press
the TONE button.
Use the sound menu to adjust the
following features:
Setting the Tone
EQ Settings
To adjust the bass, treble and
midrange:
EQ (Equalization): The EQ
settings are selected through the
sound menu. EQ provides a choice
of Manual or Talk. Turn the Menu
knob to highlight. Press SELECT to
select Manual or Talk.
Bass: Press + or - to change
the level.
Middle (Midrange): Press + or to change the level.
Treble: Press + or - to change
the level.
Adjusting the Speakers
Scroll through the settings by
turning the Menu knob. Press
SELECT to select Fade or Balance.
To adjust the speaker fade:
Press F (Front) or R (Rear) to
change from the front or rear
speakers and turn the Menu
knob for more sound from the
left or right speakers.
Bass
Middle
Treble
To adjust the speaker balance:
EQ
Fade
Balance
Press L (Left) or R (Right) to
change from the left or right
speakers.
Radio Settings
To access the Radio settings menu:
Press the CONFIG button.
Turn the Menu knob until Radio
Settings displays. Press
SELECT to display other options
within that feature.
Audio system settings or features
can be customized for:
Audio Cue Options
Auto Volume
Gracenotes Options
Startup Volume
Number of Favorite Pages
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
Infotainment System
XM Catagories
RDS
Software Version Menus
Audio Cue Options: Audio Cue
Volume: Press + or ‐ or turn the
Menu knob to increase or decrease
the audio cue volume.
Turn the Menu knob to On or OFF
to turn Audio Cues on or off.
Auto Volume: Turn the Menu knob
to select volume Off, Low, Medium,
or High.
Gracenotes Options: Press
SELECT to turn Normalization on
or off.
Startup Volume: Press + or ‐ or
turn the Menu knob to increase or
decrease the infotainment startup
volume.
Number of Favorite Pages: Turn
the Menu knob to highlight the
number of favorites. Press SELECT
to select.
XM Categories: Turn the Menu
knob to highlight the category. Press
SELECT to select. Turn the Menu
knob to Show all XM Categories to
display all categories.
7-21
Local Station List Search
RDS: Press SELECT to turn RDS
on or off.
Software Version Menus: Turn the
Menu knob to highlight the menu.
Press SELECT to select
software menu.
Finding a Station
Select a band such as AM, FM,
or XM (if equipped).
Turn the Menu knob to find a radio
station. To select a preset station,
press the corresponding preset
button.
See “Mixed-Band Presets” following
for more information.
Seeking a Station
Press g or
station.
l to search for a
To find a list of local stations in the
current AM or FM band, turn the
Menu knob. The radio performs a
search for available stations.
Mixed-Band Presets
Up to 36 preset stations can be
stored. Each page can store
six preset stations. The presets
within a page can be from different
radio bands.
To scroll through the pages, press
the FAV (favorites) button. The
current page number displays above
the preset buttons.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-22
Black plate (22,1)
Infotainment System
The stored stations for each list
displays at the bottom of the screen.
The number of preset FAV lists can
be changed.
To recall a preset station from a
FAV page:
To store a radio station to a
mixed-band preset list:
2. Press the preset button. The
stored preset station is recalled.
1. Press the SOURCE button until
the desired band is selected.
Automatic Store
2. Turn the Menu knob to the
station.
3. Press the FAV button to scroll
the list.
4. Press and hold one of the
preset buttons for more than
two seconds. The station
frequency appears on the preset
button at the bottom of the
display.
5. Repeat the steps for each preset
in each page.
1. Press the FAV button to scroll to
the page.
The strongest stations in a
radio band can be searched and
automatically stored through the
Automatic Store feature. Press
and hold the AS button until an
autostore message displays. The
12 stations with the strongest signal
strength in the current radio band
will be stored.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are
available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS
information. With RDS, the
radio can:
Seek to stations broadcasting
the selected type of
programming.
Receive announcements
concerning local and national
emergencies.
Display messages from radio
stations.
This system relies on receiving
specific information from these
stations and only works when the
information is available. In rare
cases, a radio station could
broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact
the radio station.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (23,1)
Infotainment System
The RDS system is always on.
When information is broadcast from
the current FM station, the station
name or call letters display on the
audio screen. RDS can provide a
program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the
program being broadcasted.
Satellite Radio
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Vehicles with an XM satellite radio
tuner and an XM satellite radio
subscription can receive XM
programming.
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee
is required to receive the XM
service. For more information, see
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. In
Canada, see www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677.
When XM is active, the channel
name and number, category name,
song title, and artist display on the
screen.
XM Categories
XM stations are organized in
categories.
Removing or Adding Categories
1. Press the CONFIG button.
Turn the Menu knob until
Radio displays. Press SELECT
or press Radio to display the
radio settings menu.
7-23
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S., and 1-877-438-9677 in
Canada.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated.
No action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
2. Select the Show/Hide XM
Categories screen button.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
3. Press the category buttons on
the screen to show or hide the
category.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM subscription package.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-24
Black plate (24,1)
Infotainment System
No Artist Info: The system is
working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
information is available at this
time on this channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
information is available at this
time on this channel.
No Information: The system is
working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location where the XM signal
is being blocked. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and
static can occur during normal
radio reception if items such as
cellular phone chargers, vehicle
convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or
static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
FM
FM signals only reach about
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to
reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall
buildings or hills, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (25,1)
Infotainment System
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
XM satellite radio service gives
digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Backglass Antenna
7-25
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between
the grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-26
Black plate (26,1)
Infotainment System
Satellite Radio Antenna
For vehicles with XM satellite radio
service, the antenna is located on
the roof of the vehicle. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
Audio Players
CD Player
The player can be used for CD
and MP3s.
With the ignition on, insert a CD into
the slot, label side up. The player
pulls it in and begins playing.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
video to display.
When playing any compatible
recordable disc, the sound quality
can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the quality
of the music or video that has been
recorded, or the way the disc has
been handled.
To avoid damage to the CD player:
Do not use scratched or
damaged discs
Do not apply labels to discs.
The labels could get caught in
the player.
Insert only one disc at a time.
Keep the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids and
debris.
The system is capable of playing:
Most audio CDs
CD-R
CD-RW
MP3 or unprotected WMA
formats
If a description label is needed, try
labeling the top of the disc using a
marking pen.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (27,1)
Infotainment System
Loading and Ejecting Discs
To load a disc:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Insert a disc into the slot. The
player pulls it in the rest of the
way. If the disc is damaged or
improperly loaded, there is an
error and the disc ejects.
Playing an Audio CD with a
Color Radio
A track number displays at the
beginning of each track. Song,
Artist, and Album information
displays when available.
Use the following controls to play
the disc:
‐ If longer than five seconds, the
current track starts from the
beginning.
Press and hold to fast reverse
through a track. Release the
button to return to playing
speed. Elapsed time displays.
Menu Knob:
The disc automatically plays once
loaded.
TUNE/ k (Play/Pause): Press to
start, pause, or resume play.
Turn to:
Enter the menu system.
Press X to eject a disc from the
CD player.
l (Seek Next/FWD):
Highlight a menu option.
Seeks to the next track.
Select a value.
Playing a CD
Press and hold to fast forward
through a track. Release to
return to playing speed. Elapsed
time displays.
SELECT:
A disc must be loaded to select the
source.
When a disc is loaded, the disc icon
displays.
There are two ways to play a CD:
Insert the disc and playback
starts automatically.
Press the SOURCE repeatedly
to select the disc source.
g (Seek Previous/REV):
Seeks to the beginning of the
current or previous track.
‐ If the track has been playing
for less than five seconds, it
seeks the previous track.
7-27
Press to:
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-28
Black plate (28,1)
Infotainment System
Control Buttons for Radio with
CD and DVD
CD Menu
Error Messages
If Disc Read Error displays and/or
the disc comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
The buttons used to control the
CD player are:
CD/AUX: Press to use the
CD player.
The disc has an invalid or
unknown format.
l or g :
The disc is not from a
correct region.
The disc is very hot. Try the disc
again when the temperature
returns to normal.
The road is very rough. Try the
disc again when the road is
smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
The air is very humid.
Try the disc again later.
There was a problem while
burning the disc.
The label is caught in the
CD player.
Press to select tracks or
to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the current track
that may be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Menu Knob: Turn to enter
the menu.
SELECT: Press to select an item.
CD Menu for Color Radio Only
Press SELECT to display the
CD Menu.
Shuffle: Select to play the tracks
randomly rather than in sequence.
Select again to stop shuffle. A check
mark indicates shuffle is on.
Track List: Select to display the list
of tracks on the disc. Select the
track from the list. The selected
track plays and the CD screen
displays.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (29,1)
Infotainment System
If the CD is not playing correctly, for
any other reason, try a known
good CD.
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If any error continues, contact your
dealer.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft, lint‐free cloth,
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center to
the outer edge.
CD/DVD Player
The CD/DVD player can play CDs,
DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, MP3/
WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
The CD/DVD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) discs.
Care of CDs and DVDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
Care of the CD/DVD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD/DVD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged.
7-29
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX.
l/g:
Press to select tracks or
to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the disc that may
be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Menu Knob: Turn to enter
the menu.
SELECT: Press to select an item.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-30
Black plate (30,1)
Infotainment System
X (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
or DVD‐V; press again to resume
playback. Press and hold to stop a
DVD‐V disc.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the
data stored.
Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks
Inserting a CD or DVD
Using the control buttons:
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the slot until it is
drawn in.
Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Removing a CD or DVD
Using the menu:
Press
X.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD/DVD slot.
2. Select Tracks List.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button if
there is a disc in the player.
It begins playing.
3. Select the track.
Press k to pause a CD or DVD‐A
track. Press k again to continue
playing the track.
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
Random Order
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind within the
current track.
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root
directory (disc).
The search rate increases if the
Menu knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the CD or DVD Menu:
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
4. Select the track.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (31,1)
Infotainment System
Searching for MP3s on a CD
or DVD
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Song Titles
Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
7-31
Playing a DVD‐V
1. Turn the Menu knob.
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑47 for information
about how to control a Video DVD
using the wireless remote control.
2. Select Search.
Selecting a Chapter
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
Using the control buttons:
To search for tracks:
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the Menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Press g or l to select the
previous or next chapter.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the DVD menu:
Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Turn the Menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
3. Select the chapter.
Recording an Audio or MP3
CD to MEM
1. Turn the Menu knob.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 7‑35 for more information.
2. Select Chapter List.
Selecting a Title
2. Select Title List.
3. Select the title.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-32
Black plate (32,1)
Infotainment System
Changing the Audio Stream
Cursor RIGHT
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Cursor LEFT
2. Select Audio Stream.
Up Menu
3. Select Change Audio Stream.
Use the following actions to
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V Disc
while playing chapters.
4. Press SELECT to change the
selection.
Pause (Play)
Chapter List
Title List
DVD/DVD
DVD/AUX
AUX/DVD
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu
AUX/AUX
Use the following actions to
navigate the title menu on a
DVD‐V Disc.
To navigate the menu:
Select Cancel to exit the menu.
Pausing a DVD
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Pause to pause the disc.
Select Unpause to start
playback.
Select/Enter
Cursor UP
Cursor DOWN
MP3
Playing an MP3, CD, and DVD
MP3 Format
There are guidelines that must be
met, when creating an MP3 disc or
the CD might not play.
The guidelines are:
Sampling rate: 8 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
and 320 kbps.
Maximum number of folders is
255 with a maximum hierarchy
of eight folders.
Maximum of 1024 files on a disc.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select the action.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (33,1)
Infotainment System
Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW
with a maximum capacity of
700 MB.
The Artist/Album/Song Titles/
Genre information requires a
CD to be fully scanned before
the music navigator works with
these menus. Disc scanning
does not occur when the disc is
being played.
When an MP3 is loaded in the
player, MP3 displays.
If a disc is already loaded, but you
are currently on a map screen or
listening to a different audio source,
press SOURCE to switch to the
disc source. A track number
appears on the display when
each track starts to play.
To play a disc:
TUNE/ k (Play/Pause): Use to
start, pause, or resume play of a
loaded disc.
l (Next/FWD): Press to seek to
the next track. Press again to
continue moving forward through
the disc.
Press and hold to advance quickly
through playback. Release the
button to return to playing speed.
Elapsed time displays.
g (Previous/REV):
Press to seek
to the beginning of the current or
previous track. If the track has
played for less than five seconds, it
goes to the previous track. If longer
than five seconds, the current track
restarts. Press again to continue
moving back through the disc.
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly through playback.
Release the button to return to
playing speed. Elapsed time
displays.
7-33
Menu Knob:
Turn to:
Enter the menu system.
Highlight a menu option.
Select a value.
SELECT:
Press to:
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-34
Black plate (34,1)
Infotainment System
Disc Music Menu
Select to view a list of all songs
on the disc. There might be a
delay before the list displays.
Select a song from the list and
it begins to play. Songs are
displayed based on the CD
burning application folder and
file structure used.
Press SELECT to access the
Disc music menu.
Folders/Playlists
Select to view the folders stored
on the disc. Select a folder to
view the list of all the songs in
that folder. There might be a
delay before the list displays.
Select the song from the list and
it begins to play.
Artists
Select to view the list of artists
that have been stored on the
disc. Select an artist name to
view a list of all songs by the
artist. There might be a delay
before the list displays. Select
the desired song from the list
and it begins to play.
Turn SELECT to scroll, then press
it to select any of the following
category buttons on the MP3 music
menu to display the corresponding
category screen:
Track List (All Songs)
Albums
Select to view the albums on the
disc. Select the album to view a
list of all songs on the album.
There might be a delay before
the list displays. Select a song
from the list and it begins to play.
Genres
Select to view the genres on the
disc. Select a genre to view a list
of all songs of that genre. There
might be a delay before the list
displays. Select a song from the
list and it begins to play.
Song Titles
Select to display a list of all
songs on the disc. There might
be a delay before the list
displays. Select a song from the
list and it begins to play. Songs
are displayed in alphabetical
order based on the Song Title
ID3 tag, if available.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a
folder. All files contained directly
under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory
folders.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (35,1)
Infotainment System
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or folder is empty
or contains only folders, the player
advances to the next folder in the
file structure that contains a
compressed audio file. The empty
folder(s) are not displayed or
numbered.
No Folder
When the CD only contains
compressed audio files without any
folders or playlists, all files are
located under the root folder.
File System and Naming
The displayed song title is taken
from the file's ID3 tag. If a song title
is not present in the ID3 tag, the
radio displays the file name as the
track name.
7-35
Mass Storage
Media (MEM)
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the MEM track
that may be available.
Infotainment systems with MEM
storage are able to record up to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
AM, FM, and XM radio.
TUNE/ k : Press to pause the
track currently playing; press again
to resume playback. Turn to select
tracks.
Music or content stored in MEM that
you did not create, or have the right
to distribute, must be deleted before
the sale or end of lease of the
vehicle.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
the MEM player.
l/g:
Press to select tracks
or to fast forward or rewind within
a track.
O REC: Press to record music
from a CD or USB drive.
DEL: Press to delete the current
track from MEM.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
MEM favorites.
1 to 6: Press to select a track
or playlist stored in that numeric
position.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-36
Black plate (36,1)
Infotainment System
Recording from Audio CDs
The infotainment system can record
the current song playing or all songs
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
Recording to MEM
Press O REC, then select Record
Current Song or Record All Songs
on Disc. If the track has started
playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the
beginning of the track. When the
song recording is completed, the
message Song Recorded to MEM
displays, and there may be a slight
pause.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
as the current date, disc, and track
number.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
Recording from MP3/WMA
Discs or USB Storage Devices
If the disc or track has already
been recorded to MEM, the
message The Song(s) is Already
Recorded displays.
USB Host Support
Stopping the Recording
USB Supported Devices
Press O REC while recording from
an audio CD to display the stop
recording option. Select Stop
Recording Song to MEM.
USB Flash Drives
Portable USB Hard Drives
Renaming Recorded Discs
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
3. Select the disc.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename
either one.
5. Use the Menu knob to enter
the character sequence. See
Operation on page 7‑12 for
more information.
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
Recording to MEM
Press O REC, then select Record
Current Song or Record Current
Folder.
The information stored by MEM is
titled according to the ID3 tag
associated with it.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already
been recorded to MEM, the
message The Song(s) is Already
Recorded displays.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (37,1)
Infotainment System
7-37
Stopping the Recording
3. Select the track.
Shuffle Songs
Press O REC while recording from
an MP3/WMA CD or USB storage
device to display the stop recording
option. Select Stop Recording Song
to MEM.
Searching for a Track
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly
play back tracks stored in MEM.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Playlists
Artists
Deleting Tracks from MEM
Albums
Individual tracks and all tracks can
be deleted from MEM.
Song Titles
Genres
Playlists
Artists
Albums
To search for tracks:
Genres
1. Turn the Menu knob.
To remove MEM favorites
categories:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
Playing from MEM
2. Select Search.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track if MEM is already playing from
the previously recorded disc.
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
2. Select the disc.
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite
categories are:
To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while
the track is playing.
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD
Configuring MEM Favorites
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the Menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
3. Select MEM Favorites.
2. Select Radio Settings.
4. Remove the checkmark from the
box to remove that MEM
favorites category.
Replace the checkmark to re-add
the removed category.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-38
Black plate (38,1)
Infotainment System
Saving MEM Tracks as
Favorites
Favorites can be saved by pressing
and holding one of the 1 to 6
buttons. Favorites can be stored
according to the following list:
Playlist: Adds the currently playing
track to the playlist selected.
Artist: Saves the artist associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
position.
Creating Playlists
To create a playlist using tracks
stored in MEM:
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites.
2. Select the track to be stored in
the playlist.
3. Press and hold one of the 1 to
6 buttons until the track can be
heard again to store the track.
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 7‑12.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional tracks in the
playlist.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (39,1)
Infotainment System
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
USB Drives
Genres
Zunes
Audiobooks
Composers
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,
and Zunes are compatible with the
infotainment system.
To search for tracks:
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod®
2. Select Search.
7-39
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
Connecting an iPod
4. Select the track.
USB Port
Tracks can be searched for by:
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
Playlists
Artists
Albums
iPods
Song Titles
PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
Podcasts
Adjusting the Volume
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Searching for a Track
Shuffle
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off, then
press the / BACK button to return
the main screen.
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-40
Black plate (40,1)
Infotainment System
Repeat
Song Titles
Turn the Menu knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press
the / BACK button to return the
main screen.
Podcasts
Genres
On: Repeats the current track.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
Searching for a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
2. Select Search.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
4. Select the track.
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Playlists
Repeat Functionality
Artists
Albums
Turn the Menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (41,1)
Infotainment System
Searching for a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Playlists*
Artists
Albums
Song Titles
Genres
Folder View
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
To search for tracks:
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
7-41
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to be connected
using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
or the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 7‑12.
Repeat Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Search.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-42
Black plate (42,1)
Infotainment System
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod®
Searching for a Track
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
Playlists
Artists
Tracks can be searched for by:
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Connecting an iPod
Albums
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Song Titles
Selecting a Track
Genres
Adjusting the Volume
Using the control buttons:
Composers
Audiobooks
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
USB Port
The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
iPods
USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPods or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current submenu.
The track will start to play.
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
Playing Tracks in Random Order
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs to On or Off.
2. Select Search.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the Menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (43,1)
Infotainment System
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current submenu.
The track will start to play.
Song Titles
Genres
7-43
Selecting a track in a different
folder:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
To search for tracks:
2. Select Folder List.
1. Turn the Menu knob.
3. Select the folder.
2. Select Search.
Disconnecting a USB Drive
4. Select the track.
A USB drive should be ejected from
the USB port before disconnecting
it. To eject a USB drive:
Searching for Tracks
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root
directory (USB).
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the Menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Turn the Menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 7‑35 for more information.
Selecting a Track
Tracks can be searched by:
Using the control buttons:
Playlists
Artists
Albums
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select USB Eject.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
Recording Tracks to MEM
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-44
Black plate (44,1)
Infotainment System
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD and
Touchscreen)
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port.
If an auxiliary device has already
been connected, but a different
source is currently active, Press
SOURCE repeatedly to cycle
through all of the available audio
source screens, until the AUX
source screen is selected.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described
in Overview (Radio with CD) on
page 7‑4 or Overview (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑6 or
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8.
This jack is not an audio output.
Do not plug headphones into the
auxiliary input jack. Drivers are
encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in
P (Park).
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (45,1)
Infotainment System
7-45
USB Port
Searching for a Track
Shuffle
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off, then
press the / BACK button to return
the main screen.
Playlists
Artists
Albums
iPods
PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
Song Titles
USB Drives
Podcasts
Zunes™
Genres
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Audiobooks
Repeat
Composers
1. Turn the Menu knob.
Turn the Menu knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press
the / BACK button to return to the
main screen.
2. Select Search.
On: Repeats the current track.
Connecting an iPod
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
4. Select the track.
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,
and Zunes are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod®
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
To search for tracks:
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-46
Black plate (46,1)
Infotainment System
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
To search for tracks:
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
Searching for a Track
4. Select the track.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Shuffle Functionality
Playlists
Artists
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Search.
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Albums
Song Titles
Podcasts
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Genres
Repeat Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the
current track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts
from the beginning of the current
track after the last track finishes.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (47,1)
Infotainment System
Searching for a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Playlists*
Artists
Albums
Song Titles
Genres
Folder View
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the Menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Functionality
Turn the Menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
7-47
Rear Seat
Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's infotainment system.
The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system
includes a radio with a DVD player,
two rear seat video display screens,
audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑29
or the separate navigation system
manual for more information on the
vehicle's DVD system.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-48
Black plate (48,1)
Infotainment System
Before Driving
The RSE is for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not
work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F) and
below 60°C (140°F). If the
temperature is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until it is
within the operating range.
Global Off
Depending on the infotainment
system, the RSE system may have
a Global Off feature. The Global Off
feature disables all RSE system
features. Press and hold the
radio power button for more than
three seconds for Global Off to
disable the RSE features.
On some infotainment systems, the
Global Off feature can be turned off
by performing one of the following:
Press and hold the radio power
button for more than
three seconds.
Insert or eject any disc.
Insert a DVD video disc.
Press the remote control power
button.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
or k when a DVD video disc is
in the player.
Press the SRC button on the
steering wheel when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
Cycle the ignition.
Headphones
A. Battery Cover
B. Channel 1 or 2 Switch
C. Power Button
D. Volume Control
E. Power Indicator Light
RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, and
Channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected
to the A/V jacks.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (49,1)
Infotainment System
The headphones are used to listen
to various multi‐media. The wireless
headphones have a power button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control. Turn the headphones off
when not in use.
Push O to turn on the headphones.
A light on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on,
check the batteries. Intermittent
sound or static can also indicate
weak batteries. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section
for more information.
Infrared transmitters are on the top
of the left seatback video screen.
The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system is shut off
or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. Moving too far
forward or stepping out of the
vehicle can cause the headphones
to lose the signal or have static.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control.
For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly.
Headphones should be worn with
the headband over the top of the
head for best audio reception. The
symbol L (Left) appears on the
outside bottom edge of the ear cup
and should be positioned on the left
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the outside bottom edge of the
ear cup and should be positioned on
the right ear.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool,
dry place.
7-49
If the foam ear pads attached to the
headphones become worn or
damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set.
To purchase replacement ear pads,
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries:
1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of
the headphones.
2. Slide the battery door open.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
4. Replace the battery door and
tighten the screw.
Remove the batteries if the
headphones are not going to be
used for a long period of time.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-50
Black plate (50,1)
Infotainment System
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If available, the A/V jacks are
located on the rear of the floor
console. They allow audio or
video cables to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
The A/V jacks are color coded:
Yellow for video input.
White for left audio input.
Red for right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system:
1. Connect the auxiliary device
cables to the A/V jacks.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
Changing the Source on the Video
Display Screens
The image from the auxiliary device
can be switched between the video
display screens.
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of
both video screens to the
DVD player.
To change the display:
Changing the RSE Video Screen
Settings
1. Press the AUX button on the
remote control to change the
source of both video screens
from the DVD player to the
auxiliary device.
The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can
be changed from the setup menu
using the remote control.
To change a setting:
2. Press the AUX button a second
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player
and the right video screen to the
auxiliary device.
1. Press
3. Press the AUX button a third
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.
2.
z.
Use n, q, p, o, and r to
select the settings.
3. Press z again to exit the
setup menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (51,1)
Infotainment System
Audio Output
Both seatback consoles contain an
infrared receiver for the remote
control. They are located at the
top of each console.
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following:
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
The RSE system transmits the
audio signal to the wireless
headphones if an audio signal is
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The front seat passengers are able
to listen to playback from the A/V
jacks through the vehicle speakers
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
on the radio.
Video Screens
The video screens are located in
the back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
7-51
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
Video Screen Input Jack
To use the video screen:
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use.
The screen turns off automatically.
Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones. They may
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
These LEDs are not on the right
video screen.
Each video screen is equipped with
a video input jack to allow video
cables to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
This signal will override any video
provided by the RSE system; either
the DVD or auxiliary A/V jack
source. The RSE system must be
on for this input to operate.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-52
Black plate (52,1)
Infotainment System
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at either
seatback console and press the
button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control.
Check the batteries if the remote
control does not seem to be
working. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote
control.
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
O button can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the
disc. The infotainment system can
also turn on the video screen
display. See CD/DVD Player on
page 7‑29 or the separate
navigation system manual for
more information.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press to turn the video
screens on and off.
P (Illumination):
Press to turn
the remote control backlight on.
The backlight times out after several
seconds if no other button is
pressed.
v (Title):
Press to return to the
main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button
only operates when using a DVD.
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (53,1)
Infotainment System
z (Display Menu):
Press to adjust
the brightness and screen display
mode, and display the
language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press to start
playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again
to continue playing.
Depending on the infotainment
system in the vehicle, DVD
playback may be slowed down by
pressing s then [. Reverse slow
play by pressing s then r.
Press s again to cancel slow play.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press again
to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press s. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release r.
This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
7-53
[ (Fast Forward):
Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
{ (Subtitles):
Press to turn ON/
OFF subtitles and to move through
subtitle options when a DVD is
playing.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-54
Infotainment System
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the video display between the
DVD player and an auxiliary source.
The AUX button also controls the
source display between the left and
right video screens as described
in the table below:
Aux
Button
Press
Default
State (No
Press)
First
Press
Black plate (54,1)
Left
Screen
DVD
Media
Right
Screen
DVD
Media
Aux Video Aux Video
Source
Source
Second
Press
DVD
Media
Aux Video
Source
Third
Press
Aux Video
Source
DVD
Media
Fourth
Press
Return to
Default
State
Return to
Default
State
2 (Camera): Press to change the
camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature when the DVD is
playing.
\ (Clear) (If Available):
Press this
button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to
clear all numeric inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries)
(If Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers
greater than 9. Press this button
before inputting the number.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
Replacing the Remote Control
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba® code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Remove the batteries from the
remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (55,1)
Infotainment System
7-55
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black
borders on the top and bottom or both sides, or it
looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no obstruction between
the remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at
the beginning.
If the Stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
Stop button was pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture
or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
source mode by pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-56
Black plate (56,1)
Infotainment System
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
and interference from cellular telephone towers or
by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using
the L (Left) and R (Right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are positioned properly
with the headband across the top of the head.
I lost the remote and/or the headphones.
See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the
DVD player by pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen may display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error or
Mechanical Error: There are disc
load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error or Unknown
Format: The disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or the
disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
region.
No Disc Inserted: No disc is
present when the X or MEM/DVD/
AUX button is pressed on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
machines, or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar System.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (57,1)
Infotainment System
Cleaning the RSE Seatback
Console
Phone
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE
seatback console surface.
Bluetooth (Overview)
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
touching or cleaning the screen as
damage could result.
For vehicles equipped with
Bluetooth capability, the system can
interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
Placement and receipt of calls
in a hands-free mode.
Sharing of the cell phone’s
address book or contact list
with the vehicle.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the
vehicle parked:
Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
7-57
Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
this section for more information.
If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list.
See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
section for more information.
See “Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers” in this section for
more information.
{ WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(navigation) system. Taking your
eyes off the road too long or
too often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-58
Black plate (58,1)
Infotainment System
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls.
The infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control the
system. The system can be
used while in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or cancel
an operation.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Infotainment System Controls
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
If equipped, the infotainment system
allows certain controls to be
selected on the infotainment display.
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Overview
(Radio with CD) on page 7‑4 or
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and
MEM) on page 7‑6 or Overview
(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)
on page 7‑8 or AM-FM Radio (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 or
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19.
5 (Phone): Press to enter the
Phone main menu.
Steering Wheel Controls
Voice Recognition
b / g (Push To Talk) :
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Press to
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start voice
recognition.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Use the
VOL/ O knob during a call to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. The system
maintains a minimum volume level.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (59,1)
Infotainment System
Other Information
®
The Bluetooth word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Overview
(Radio with CD) on page 7‑4 or
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and
MEM) on page 7‑6 or Overview
(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)
on page 7‑8 or AM-FM Radio (Radio
with CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 or
AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19.
Pairing Information
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be paired to
the vehicle as a phone and an
MP3 player at the same time.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Pairing
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
vehicle before it can be used. See
your cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
phone is not connected, calls will be
made using OnStar Hands‐Free
Calling, if available. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1 for more
information.
7-59
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-60
Black plate (60,1)
Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings or
Bluetooth Settings (depending
on the radio).
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four‐digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
appears on the display.
The PIN is used is Step 6.
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone to be paired to the
vehicle. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
information on this process.
6. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 4. After the
PIN is successfully entered, the
system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone.
This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
paired and connected to the
vehicle. The system responds
with “ has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to
pair additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings or
Bluetooth Settings (depending
on the radio).
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the phone to delete and
follow the on screen prompts.
Linking to a Different Phone
To link to a different phone, the new
phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
Bluetooth system before the
process is started.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings or
Bluetooth Settings (depending
on the radio).
3. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the new phone to
link to and follow the on
screen prompts.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings or
Bluetooth Settings (depending
on the radio).
3. Select Bluetooth.
If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will
be deleted.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (61,1)
Infotainment System
Making a Call Using
Phone Book
For cell phones that support the
phone book feature, the Bluetooth
system can use the contacts stored
on your cell phone to make calls.
See your cell phone's owner's guide
or contact your wireless provider to
find out if this feature is supported
by your phone.
When a cell phone supports the
phone book feature, the Phone
Book and Call Lists menus are
automatically available.
Radio with CD
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
To make a call using the Phone
Book menu:
1. Press
1. Press
5 twice.
2. Select Phone Book.
3. Search through the list by
selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with,
or press SELECT to scroll
through the entire list of names/
numbers in the phone book.
5.
2. Select Phone Book.
3. Search through the list by
selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with,
or press SELECT to scroll
through the entire list of names/
numbers in the phone book.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
The Phone Book menu allows you
to access the phone book stored in
the cell phone to make a call.
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
1. Press
The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your cell
phone to make a call.
1. Press
5 twice.
2. Select Call Lists.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
7-61
5.
2. Select Call Lists.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-62
Infotainment System
Making a Call
Radio with CD
1. Press
Black plate (62,1)
5 twice.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Overview (Radio
with CD) on page 7‑4 or
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) on page 7‑6 or
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for
more information.
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Overview (Radio
with CD) on page 7‑4 or
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) on page 7‑6 or
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for
more information.
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting or Declining a Call
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Accepting a Call
Turn the Menu knob to “Answer”
and press SELECT to accept
the call.
Declining a Call
Turn the Menu knob to “Decline”
and press SELECT to decline
the call.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
Accepting a Call
To switch between calls:
Turn the Menu knob to “Answer”
and press SELECT to accept
the call.
1. Turn the Menu Knob and
press SELECT.
1. Press
5.
2. Select Enter number.
Declining a Call
Turn the Menu knob to “Decline”
and press SELECT to decline
the call.
Switching Between Calls
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (63,1)
Infotainment System
Conference Calling
Conference calling and three‐way
calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
4. After the call has been placed,
turn the Menu Knob to choose
Merge Calls then press SELECT.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 1
through 4. The number of callers
that can be added is limited by
your wireless service carrier.
1. Turn the Menu Knob and
press SELECT.
Ending a Call
2. Select Enter Number.
Turn the Menu knob to select Hang
Up, then press SELECT.
3. Enter the character sequence
then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in
Overview (Radio with CD) on
page 7‑4 or Overview (Radio
with CD/DVD and MEM) on
page 7‑6 or Overview (Radio
with CD and Touchscreen) on
page 7‑8 for more information.
Muting a Call
To Mute a Call
Turn the Menu knob to select Mute
Call, then press SELECT.
To Cancel Mute
Turn the Menu knob to select Mute
Call, then press SELECT.
7-63
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu‐driven
phone system.
1. Turn the Menu knob to
select Enter Number, then
press SELECT.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Overview (Radio
with CD) on page 7‑4 or
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) on page 7‑6 or
Overview (Radio with CD and
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for
more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-64
Black plate (64,1)
Infotainment System
Bluetooth
(Voice Recognition)
Pairing Information
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be paired to
the vehicle as a phone and an
MP3 player at the same time.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Using Voice Recognition
To use voice recognition, press the
b / g button located on the steering
wheel. Use the commands below
for the various voice features.
For additional information, say
"Help" while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Pairing
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
vehicle before it can be used. See
your cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
phone is not connected, calls will be
made using OnStar Hands‐Free
Calling, if available. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1 for more
information.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
can be skipped.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 3. After the
PIN is successfully entered, the
system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (65,1)
Infotainment System
This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
paired and connected to the
vehicle. The system responds
with “ has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Deleting a Paired Phone
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.”
3. Say “Change phone.”
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete.
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed
by a tone.
7-65
If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“ is now
connected.”
If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
The system can store up to 30
phone numbers as name tags in the
Hands‐Free Directory that is shared
between the Bluetooth and OnStar
systems.
The following commands are used
to delete and store phone numbers.
Store: This command will store a
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-66
Black plate (66,1)
Infotainment System
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
Directory and the Destinations
Directory.
Using the “Store” Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Store.”
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Using the “Digit Store” Command
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the
Destinations Directory.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
To delete all name tags:
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered, say
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
Using the “Delete” Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Delete.”
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
Using the “List” Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (67,1)
Infotainment System
Making a Call
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Dial or Call: The dial or call
command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial: This command allows
a phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Re‐dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the
cell phone.
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
7-67
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
The system dials the last
number called from the
connected cell phone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
b / g to answer the call.
Press 0 / c to ignore a call.
Press
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-68
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
Black plate (68,1)
Press b / g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
Press b / g again to return to
the original call.
To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
Press 0 / c to disconnect the
current call and switch to the
call on hold.
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
b / g.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b / g to link all callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press
0 / c to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
To mute a call, press b /
then say “Mute Call.”
g, and
To cancel mute, press b /
then say “Un‐mute Call.”
g, and
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the
cell phone.
The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
To Transfer Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in
the vehicle:
1. Press
b / g.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System from a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press b / g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
more information.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (69,1)
Infotainment System
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the
cell phone:
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
can be skipped.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing
.”
The cell phone's normal prompt
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menu‐driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
7-69
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Deleting
Name Tags.”
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-70
Black plate (70,1)
Infotainment System
Bluetooth
(UHP Mexico Only)
General Information
Vehicles with a Universal
Hands‐free Phone (UHP) system
can use a Bluetooth® capable
mobile phone with a Hands-Free
Profile to make and receive phone
calls. The infotainment system and
voice control are used to control the
system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
the UHP system can be up to
10 m (33 ft). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the UHP system.
Other Information
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
UHP Controls
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
UHP system.
$ / i (End call/Mute) : Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
To make outgoing calls using the
call list.
b / g button.
Steering Wheel Controls
1. Press the
Steering wheel controls can be
used to:
2. Highlight the phone number by
toggling the SRC switch up
or down.
Answer incoming calls
Confirm system information
Start voice recognition
3. Dial the highlighted number by
pressing the b / g button.
End a call
Infotainment System Controls
Reject a call
Cancel an operation
Make outgoing calls using the
call list
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
navigation system controls, see the
separate Navigation System
Manual.
b / g (Push To Talk) :
Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
voice control. Press and hold for
two to three seconds to access
the call list.
PHONE : Press to enter the Phone
main menu.
Voice Control
The voice control system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (71,1)
Infotainment System
7-71
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
3. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select Ring Tones.
4. Select Activation.
4. Select Ring Tone 1, 2, or 3.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
Changing Bluetooth Code
Default Settings
The default Bluetooth code should
work with most mobile phones.
If you are having difficulty pairing
your mobile phone, you can change
the code at any time.
Selecting this option will reset the
ring tones and the Bluetooth code.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the UHP system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front
audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system.
Use the VOL/ O knob during a call
to change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. The system
maintains a minimum volume level.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Change Bluetooth Code.
5. Enter a new four-digit code, then
select OK.
Ring Tone
Turning Bluetooth On or Off
There are three different ring tones
available for the UHP system.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
To change the ring tone:
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled mobile phone
must be paired to the UHP system
first and then connected to the
vehicle before it can be used. See
the mobile phone manufacturer's
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the mobile phone.
Pairing Information:
Up to five mobile phones can be
paired to the UHP system
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving
The UHP system connects with
the first available paired mobile
phone in the order the phone
was paired
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-72
Black plate (72,1)
Infotainment System
Only one paired mobile phone
can be connected to the UHP
system at a time
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the mobile phone
is deleted
Using UHP with Infotainment
Controls
Pairing a Phone
If your mobile phone has simple
pairing or auto discovery features,
they need to be turned off before
the mobile phone can be paired to
the UHP system. Reference the
mobile phone manufacturer's user
guide for information on these
features.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Pair Device or Add new
Hands‐free (HF) device on a
navigation radio. A four-digit
number appears on the display
and the UHP system goes into
discovery mode.
Viewing All Paired and Connected
Phones
5. Start the pairing process on the
mobile phone that will be paired
to the vehicle. Reference the
mobile phone manufacturer's
user guide for information on this
process.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
Locate the device named UHP
followed by a four‐digit number
in the list on the mobile phone
and follow the instructions on the
mobile phone and enter the
four-digit code provided by the
system if necessary, then follow
the instructions on the
infotainment display screen.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional mobile phones.
To view all available mobile phones
that are paired to the UHP system:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to pair
additional mobile phones.
Deleting a Paired Phone
To remove a paired mobile phone
from the UHP system:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the mobile phone to
delete and follow the on screen
prompts.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (73,1)
Infotainment System
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different paired
mobile phone, the new mobile
phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
UHP system before the process is
started.
To connect to a different phone:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings, or touch
Phone on a navigation radio.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the new mobile phone to
link to and follow the on screen
prompts.
If delete is selected, the highlighted
mobile phone will be deleted.
Making a Call Using Phone Book
and Call List
For mobile phones that support the
phone book and call list features,
the UHP system can use the
contacts and call lists stored on
your mobile phone to make calls.
See your mobile phone
manufacturer's user guide or
contact your wireless provider to
find out if this feature is supported
by your mobile phone.
The time it takes to download the
phone book and call list from your
mobile phone to the UHP system
can vary depending on the size of
the phone book and call list stored
on your mobile phone.
When a mobile phone supports the
phone book and call list features,
the Phone Book, and Call Lists
menus are automatically available.
7-73
The Phone Book menu allows you
to access the phone book stored in
the mobile phone to make a call.
The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your mobile
phone to make a call.
To make a call using the Phone
Book menu:
1. Press the PHONE button twice,
or press the PHONE button
once on vehicles with a
navigation system.
2. Select Phone Book.
3. You can search through the list
by selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with, to
continue scrolling through the
entire list, turn the Menu knob.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-74
Black plate (74,1)
Infotainment System
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
1. Press the PHONE button twice,
or press the PHONE button
once on vehicles with a
navigation system.
2. Select Call Lists.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Making a Call
To make a call:
1. Press the PHONE button twice,
or press the PHONE button
once on vehicles with a
navigation system.
2. Select Enter Number for vehicles
without a navigation system.
3. Select the numbers to be dialed.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, touch the numbers on
the infotainment screen. For
vehicles without a navigation
system, see “Entering a
Character Sequence” in for
more information.
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting or Declining a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
To accept the incoming call, turn the
Menu knob to “Answer” and press
SELECT, or press the b / g button
on the steering wheel controls.
To decline the incoming call, turn
the Menu knob to “Decline” and
press SELECT, or press the
b / g button on the steering
wheel controls.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the mobile phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
To accept the incoming call, turn the
Menu knob to “Answer” and press
SELECT, or press the b / g button
on the steering wheel controls.
To decline the incoming call,
turn the Menu knob to “Decline”
and press SELECT, or press
the $ / i button on the
steering wheel controls.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (75,1)
Infotainment System
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Conference calling and three way
calling must be supported on the
mobile phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
Press SELECT and select Hang Up,
or press the $ / i button on the
steering wheel controls.
To start a conference calling while
in a call:
1. Press SELECT and select Enter
Number.
To Mute a Call
Press SELECT and select
Mute Call.
To Cancel Mute
2. Enter the character sequence
then select call.
Press SELECT and select
Mute Call.
3. After the call has been placed,
press SELECT and choose
Merge Calls.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
4. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat steps 1
through 3. The number of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
To disconnect from one caller while
in a conference call, select Detach
Number from the menu and select
the number to hang up on.
The UHP system can send numbers
during a call. This is used when
calling a menu driven phone
system.
To access this system:
1. Press SELECT and select Enter
Number.
2. Enter the character sequence.
7-75
Operating UHP Using Voice
Control
The voice control of the UHP
system enables you to operate
several functions of the mobile
phone using your voice. The UHP
system uses voice commands to
control the system and dial phone
numbers. After input of the
command the infotainment system
guides you through the dialogue
with appropriate questions and
feedback to achieve the desired
action. The commands and
numbers can be spoken without a
pause between the individual words.
In addition you can save telephone
numbers under a name tag that is
selectable by you. The telephone
connection can be set up with
this name.
In the event of incorrect operation or
incorrect codes, the voice control
gives you voice feedback and
requests you to re-enter the
desired command.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-76
Black plate (76,1)
Infotainment System
Apart from this, the voice control
acknowledges important commands
and will ask if necessary.
In order that calls are made
inside the vehicle do not lead to
unintentional triggering of the mobile
phone, the voice control does not
start until it has been activated.
Activating the Voice Control
For vehicles without a navigation
system, press the b / g button on
the steering wheel to activate the
voice control of the UHP system.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, press the b / g button on
the steering wheel to activate the
voice control of the UHP system
The system responds with a tone.
After the tone, say ”Phone.“
For the duration of the dialogue any
audio source that is active is muted
and any traffic news fade-in is
cancelled.
Adjusting the Volume for
Voice Output
Turn the volume knob of the
Infotainment system or press
the + / - buttons on the
steering wheel.
Canceling Dialogue
There are various possibilities of
deactivating the voice control and
cancelling the dialogue:
Main Menu Commands
The UHP system has a set of main
menu commands that are available
when voice control is first started.
After the voice control is activated,
a short tone indicates that the
voice control system is waiting
for a command.
Available commands:
“Dial”
Press the $ / i button on
the steering wheel controls.
“Call”
“Re-dial”
Enter the command “Cancel.”
“Save”
Do not enter a command for
some time.
“Delete”
“Directory”
“Pair”
“Select device”
“Voice feedback”
“Help”
“Cancel”
The command is unrecognized
after three tries.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (77,1)
Infotainment System
Frequently Used Commands
Here is a list of frequently used
commands:
“Help”: the dialogue is
terminated and all commands
available in the current context
are enumerated.
“Cancel”: the voice control is
deactivated.
“Yes”: a suitable action is
triggered depending on the
context.
“No”: a suitable action is
triggered depending on the
context.
Pairing, Saving, or Deleting Phone
From Device List
With the command “Pair” a mobile
phone can be saved to or deleted
from the device list of the UHP
system. A device number will be
assigned by the UHP system to the
mobile phone when it is paired.
Available commands:
(At this time, start the pairing
process on the mobile phone that
will be paired to the vehicle.
Reference the mobile phone
manufacturer's user guide for
information on this process. Locate
the device named UHP followed by
a four‐digit number in the list on the
mobile phone and follow the
instructions on the mobile phone
and enter the four-digit code
provided by the system.)
“Add”
“Delete”
“Help”
Voice output: “Do you want to pair
the device?”
“Cancel”
User: “Yes.”
Example of a Dialogue
Voice Feedback
User: “Pair.”
Each voice input is answered or
commented on by the infotainment
system by way of a voice output
that is adapted to the situation.
Voice output: “Do you want to
add or delete a device?”
To switch the voice output on or off,
enter “Voice feedback” or press
the b / g button.
7-77
User: “Add.”
Voice output: “Using the pair
function in the external device,
enter <1234> to pair.”
Voice output: “Paired, ending
session.”
Selecting Phone from Device List
The “Select device” command can
be used to select a different paired
mobile phone. The UHP system
asks for a device number that was
assigned by the UHP system to the
mobile phone when it was paired.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-78
Black plate (78,1)
Infotainment System
Voice output: “Please, say a device
number to select.”
Recognition is best, if a pause of at
least half a second is made after
every three to five digits. The
infotainment system then repeats
the numbers recognized.
User: “device number.”
Available Commands:
Voice output: “Do you want to select
the device number “device number.”
“Dial”: the inputs are accepted.
“Digit”: a numeric value between
“0-9” is entered.
“Delete”: the number last
entered or the block of numbers
last entered is deleted.
Example of a Dialogue
“Plus”: a preceding “+” is entered
for a call abroad.
Voice output: “Please, say the
number to dial.”
“Verify”: the inputs are repeated
by the voice output.
User: “Plus four nine.”
“Asterisk”: an asterisk “*” is
entered.
Voice output: “Seven three one.”
After the “Dial” command, the voice
control requests input of a number.
“Hash”: a hash character “#” is
entered.
Voice output: “One one nine nine.”
The telephone number must be
spoken in your normal speech
without any artificial pauses
between the numbers.
“Pause”: a pause is entered into
the character sequence.
Example of a Dialogue
User: “Select device.”
(The device name appears on the
infotainment display screen)
User: “Yes.”
Voice output: “One moment please,
the system searches for the
selected device.”
Voice output: “Device number
“device number” is selected, ending
session.”
Telephone Number Dialing
“Help”
“Cancel”
The telephone number entered can
have a maximum length of 25 digits.
To be able to make a call abroad
you can say the word “Plus” (+) at
the beginning of your number. The
plus allows you to call from any
country without knowing the prefix
for calls made abroad in that
country. Then say the required
country code.
User: “Dial.”
User: “Seven three one.”
User: “One one nine nine.”
User: “Dial.”
Voice output: “The number is being
dialled.”
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (79,1)
Infotainment System
Making a Call Using Name Tag
Starting a Second Call
When the “Call” command is used,
a telephone number is entered that
has been stored in the telephone
book as a name tag.
Press the button b / g to start a
second call during an active
telephone call.
Available commands:
Available commands:
7-79
Voice output: “Please, say the
number to send.”
(for number input information, see
the dialogue example for “Making a
Call Using a Telephone Number”
earlier in this section)
“Send”: activate manual DTMF
(touch-tone dialling), e.g. for
voice mail or telephone banking.
User: “Send.”
“Send name tag”: activate DTMF
(touch-tone dialling) by entering
a name tag.
The “Re-dialing” command re-dials
the last number dialed.
Example of a Dialogue
“Dial”
User: “Call.”
“Call”
Voice output: “Please, say the name
tag to call.”
“Re-dialing”
(for name tag information, see
“Saving a Name Tag” later in this
section)
“Help”
The “Save” command is used to
store a telephone number in the
telephone book under as a
name tag.
“Cancel”
“Yes”
“No”
“Help”
“Cancel”
User: ”Name tag.“
Example of a Dialogue
Voice output: “Seven three one.”
User: Press the b / g button if a
telephone call is active.
User: “Yes.”
User: “Send.”
Voice output: “Calling.”
Re-dialing
Saving a Name Tag
The name entered must be
repeated once. The pitch and
pronunciation must be as identical
as possible for both name inputs,
otherwise the voice control will
reject the inputs.
A maximum of 50 name tags can be
stored in the telephone book.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-80
Infotainment System
Name tags are speaker-dependent,
i.e. only the person who recorded a
name tag can open it. To avoid the
start of the recording of a saved
name from being cut off, a short
pause should be left after an
input request.
To be able to use the name tag
independently of the location,
i.e. including other countries, all
telephone numbers should be
entered with a “plus” character
and a country code.
Available commands:
Black plate (80,1)
“Save”: the inputs are accepted.
“Re-dialing”: the last input is
repeated.
“Help”
“Cancel”
Example of a Dialogue
Deleting a Name Tag
User: “Save.”
The “Delete” command is used to
delete a previously saved name tag.
Voice output: “Please, say the
number to save.”
Available commands:
User: Say number to save.
“Yes”
(for number input information, see
the dialogue example for “Making a
Call Using a Telephone Number”
earlier in this section)
“No”
“Help”
“Cancel”
User: “Save.”
Listening to Stored Name Tags
User: “Name Tag” (give name tag).
The “Directory” command is used to
listen to all stored name tags.
Voice output: “Please, repeat the
name tag to confirm.”
User: “Name Tag”
Available commands:
“Call”: the telephone number of
the voice tag last read aloud is
selected.
“Delete”: the entry of the voice
tag last read aloud is deleted.
Voice output: “Saving the
name tag.”
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (81,1)
Infotainment System
otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
Trademarks and
License Agreements
Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks and DTS
Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software.
All Rights Reserved.
7-81
Manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are registered
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless
"Made for iPod" means that an
electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically
to iPod and has been certified
by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
and iPod touch are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
7-82
Black plate (82,1)
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. Power
F.
B. Temperature Control
G. Defrost
C. Fan Control
H. Air Conditioning
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
I.
E. Recirculation
AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Rear Window Defogger
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
8-2
Black plate (2,1)
Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation. If the air delivery mode,
fan speed, recirculation, or air
conditioning setting is adjusted, the
AUTO indicator turns off and the
selected settings will appear on
the display.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Adjust
the temperature as needed for
best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather.
The recirculation light will not come
on. Press > to select recirculation;
press it again to select outside air.
Q TEMP R (Temperature
Control): Press to increase or
decrease the temperature.
Manual Operation
O (Power):
Press to turn the fan
on or off.
Q A R (Fan Control):
Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed setting appears on
the main display. Pressing either
button cancels automatic fan control
and the fan can be controlled
manually. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
Q N R (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic air delivery control and
the direction of the airflow can be
controlled manually. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield. Selecting defrost will
disable automatic control.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Climate Controls
# (Air Conditioning):
8-3
Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. If the fan is turned off or the
outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioning system
will not run.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation and
recirculation runs automatically as
needed.
The auto rear defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes, or after five minutes if
the outside temperature is not
as cold.
Rear Window Defogger
Pressing this button cancels
automatic air conditioning and turns
off the air conditioner. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation and
the air conditioner runs
automatically as needed. When the
indicator light is on, the air
conditioner runs automatically to
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
dry the air needed to defog the
windshield faster.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
on and help to clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirror. See
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.
> (Recirculation): Press to
alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in
outside air. When the indicator light
is on, air is being recirculated inside
the vehicle. This helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or
prevent outside air and odors
from entering.
The rear window defogger turns off
automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about five minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation. See
“Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and
the outside temperature is about
4°C (40°F) and below.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation (if equipped): When the
vehicle is started remotely, the
climate control system will use the
last setting before the vehicle was
shut off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
8-4
Black plate (4,1)
Climate Controls
If Automatic Operation was set, the
fan speed will adjust to maximize
heating or cooling. If Manual
Operation was set, the fan speed
will be limited to the last setting. In
extreme temperatures, the system
may not be able to heat or cool the
vehicle to the preset temperature
during the remote start run time.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensor
The solar sensor, located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
Do not cover the sensor; otherwise
the automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Non-eAssist Vehicles
A. Power
G. Passenger Temperature Control
B. Driver Temperature Control
H. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
C. Defrost
I.
Rear Window Defogger
D. Fan Control
J.
Heated Steering Wheel
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
K. Air Conditioning
F.
L.
Recirculation/Automatic
Recirculation
ZONE
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Climate Controls
8-5
The following are climate control
settings that use more fuel:
Comfort air conditioning mode.
The Defrost mode.
Extreme temperature settings,
such as 15°C (60°F) or
32°C (90°F).
High fan speed settings.
To help reduce fuel usage:
Use the full automatic control as
described under “Automatic
Operation”.
Use eco air conditioning, instead
of the comfort air conditioning.
Select a temperature setting that
is higher in hot weather and
lower in cold weather.
Turn off the air conditioning
when it is not needed.
Only use defrost to clear the
windows.
eAssist Vehicles
A. Power
J.
B. Driver Temperature Control
K. Comfort Air Conditioning
C. Defrost
L.
D. Fan Control
Climate Control Influence on
eAssist Operation and Fuel
Economy (If Equipped)
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
F.
Recirculation/Automatic
Recirculation
G. Passenger Temperature Control
H. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
I.
Rear Window Defogger
Eco Air Conditioning
ZONE
The climate control system is
dependent upon other vehicle
systems for heat and power input.
Certain climate control settings can
lead to higher fuel usage and/or
fewer auto stops.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
8-6
Black plate (6,1)
Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation. If the air delivery mode,
fan speed, recirculation, or air
conditioning setting is adjusted, the
AUTO indicator turns off and the
selected settings will appear on the
display.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Adjust
the temperature as needed for
best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather.
The recirculation light will not come
on. Press > to select recirculation;
press it again to select outside air.
Q TEMP R (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature.
ZONE: Press to link all climate
zone settings to the driver settings.
The ZONE indicator light will turn
off. When the passenger settings
are adjusted, the ZONE indicator
light is on.
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the fan off
or on.
Q A R (Fan Control):
Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed setting appears on
the main display. Pressing either
button cancels automatic fan control
and the fan is controlled manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
Q N R (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic air delivery control and
the direction of the airflow is
controlled manually. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Climate Controls
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield.
air conditioner runs automatically to
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
dry the air needed to defog the
windshield faster.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
For eAssist vehicles, an auto stop
may occur if the climate control
system determines the a/c
compressor can be shut off and still
maintain comfort levels with minimal
windshield fogging.
For eAssist vehicles that have the
auto defog feature, auto stops can
occur in defrost mode. In this mode,
the auto stops are shorter and less
frequent than other air delivery
modes to prevent instant fogging.
# (Comfort Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. If the climate
control system is turned off or the
outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic air conditioning and
turns off the air conditioner.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs automatically as needed.
When the indicator light is on, the
Eco # (Eco Air Conditioning,
If Equipped): This setting balances
fuel economy and air conditioning
comfort. In warm weather
conditions, auto stops may occur
more frequently and the vehicle
interior may be warmer as
compared to the comfort air
conditioning. The eco a/c setting
allows higher humidity inside the
vehicle and window fogging before
the engine restarts.
Pressing the 0 button during an
auto stop will restart the engine to
prevent window fogging. To reach
comfort levels quickly during an
auto stop, the engine will restart if
8-7
the air conditioner is off and the
AUTO, eco #, or Comfort # is
selected. The engine also restarts
if the O is pressed on and the
system is set to AUTO, eco #,
or Comfort #.
If temperature controls are adjusted
cooler by more than 1°C (1°F)
during an auto stop, the engine will
restart to ensure that comfort is
reached.
> / / (Recirculation/Auto
Recirculation): Press to change to
automatic control of air recirculation
inside the vehicle. When the auto
recirculation indicator light is on, the
air is automatically recirculated as
needed to help quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle.
In auto recirculation control, the Air
Quality Control system may operate
when pollution is detected. To adjust
the sensitivity of the Air Quality
Control, see “Climate and Air
Quality” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
8-8
Black plate (8,1)
Climate Controls
When the > indicator light is on, air
is recirculated inside the vehicle.
If both indicator lights are off,
outside air will flow into the vehicle.
Press AUTO or / to return to
automatic operation.
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. The fan speed may
slightly increase to help prevent
fogging. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Rear Window Defogger
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about five minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation. See
“Climate and Air Quality” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and
the outside temperature is about
4°C (40°F) and below. The auto
rear defogger turns off automatically
after about 10 minutes, or after
five minutes if the outside
temperature is not as cold.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
on and help to clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirror. See
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
( (Heated Steering Wheel):
For vehicles with this feature, press
to turn on or off. See Heated
Steering Wheel on page 5‑3.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation (if equipped): When the
vehicle is started remotely, the
climate control system will use the
last setting before the vehicle was
shut off. If Automatic Operation was
set, the fan speed will adjust to
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Climate Controls
maximize heating or cooling. If
Manual Operation was set, the fan
speed will be limited to the last
setting. In extreme temperatures,
the system may not be able to heat
or cool the vehicle to the preset
temperature during the remote start
run time.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensor
The solar sensor, located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
Do not cover the sensor; otherwise
the automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Air Vents
Use the louvers located on the
air vents to change the direction
of the airflow.
To open the vent, move the
thumbwheel to t. To close the vent,
move the thumbwheel to l.
For vehicles with eAssist, there is a
battery cooling air vent located on
the shelf behind the rear passenger
seats below the rear window. Keep
this air inlet clear from items that
may block air flow. Proper airflow is
required to keep the eAssist battery
and control system cool.
8-9
Operation Tips
Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
Keep the path under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
8-10
Climate Controls
Maintenance
Air Intake
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
from the air intake at the base of the
windshield that can block the flow of
air into the vehicle.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 for replacement intervals.
For more information, see your
dealer.
Black plate (10,1)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (1,1)
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Brakes
9-15
9-16
9-18
9-20
9-24
9-25
9-25
9-26
9-27
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . .
9-33
9-34
9-36
9-36
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . .
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . .
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . .
9-36
9-37
9-39
9-39
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-2
Black plate (2,1)
Driving and Operating
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-50
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing (Except
eAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing (eAssist) . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
9-54
9-54
Driving Information
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms
and can take your focus from the
task of driving. Exercise good
judgment and do not let other
activities divert your attention
away from the road. Many local
governments have enacted laws
regarding driver distraction.
Become familiar with the local laws
in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, always
keep your eyes on the road, hands
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
9-57
9-59
9-59
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Do not use a phone in
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to
place or receive necessary
phone calls.
Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or
other electronic devices.
Designate a front seat
passenger to handle potential
distractions.
Become familiar with vehicle
features before driving, such as
programming favorite radio
stations and adjusting climate
control and seat settings.
Program all trip information into
any navigation device prior to
driving.
Wait until the vehicle is parked
to retrieve items that have fallen
to the floor.
Stop or park the vehicle to tend
to children.
Keep pets in an appropriate
carrier or restraint.
Avoid stressful conversations
while driving, whether with a
passenger or on a cell phone.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (3,1)
Driving and Operating
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the Infotainment section for
more information on using that
system, including pairing and using
a cell phone.
If equipped, refer to the navigation
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using
a cell phone.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑13.
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
front of you.
Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking.
(Continued)
9-3
WARNING (Continued)
Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
control a vehicle while driving.
Braking
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is
about three‐fourths of a second.
In that time, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
distance in an emergency.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-4
Driving and Operating
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
include:
Black plate (4,1)
Keep enough distance between
you and the vehicle in front
of you.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Keep pace with traffic.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. Doing so could make the
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some
power brake assist but it will be
used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If your vehicle has electric power
steering it does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance
is not required.
If power steering assist is lost due
to a system malfunction, the vehicle
can be steered, but may require
increased effort.
If the steering wheel is turned in
either direction several times until it
stops, or it is held until it is stopped
for an extended time, power
steering assist should return shortly
after a few normal steering
movements.
See specific vehicle steering
messages under Vehicle Messages
on page 5‑33.
See your dealer if there is a
problem.
Variable Effort Steering
Some vehicles have a steering
system that varies the amount of
effort required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower speeds to
make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park.
At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel
to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer for service.
Hydraulic Power Steering
If your vehicle has hydraulic power
steering, it may require
maintenance. See Power Steering
Fluid Power Steering Fluid (2.4L L4
Engine) on page 10‑21 or Power
Steering Fluid (3.6L V6 Engine) on
page 10‑21.
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but may require increased
effort. See your dealer if there is
a problem.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (5,1)
Driving and Operating
Curve Tips
Take curves at a reasonable
speed.
Reduce speed before entering a
curve.
Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve
Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
Off-Road Recovery
There are some situations when
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking.
Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn
180 degrees without removing
a hand.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
allows steering while braking.
3. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
Steering in Emergencies
9-5
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
these tips:
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer the vehicle so that it
straddles the edge of the
pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
Braking Skid — wheels are not
rolling.
Steering or Cornering
Skid — too much speed or
steering in a curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force.
Acceleration Skid — too much
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids
by taking reasonable care suited
to existing conditions, and by not
overdriving those conditions.
But skids are always possible.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-6
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Black plate (6,1)
Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. The vehicle may
straighten out. Be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Slow down and adjust your
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
material on the road. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Try to avoid sudden steering,
acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (7,1)
Driving and Operating
9-7
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
Other driving tips include:
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep the interior
temperature cool.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑44.
Turn off cruise control.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-8
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Black plate (8,1)
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Be alert on top of hills,
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑33 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (9,1)
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑9. To get help and keep
everyone in the vehicle safe:
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
“Climate Control System” in
the Index.
(Continued)
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
(Continued)
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
9-9
WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑28.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-10
Black plate (10,1)
Driving and Operating
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑64.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑94.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (11,1)
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and
Loading Information label shows
the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
9-11
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑44 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-12
Black plate (12,1)
Driving and Operating
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing (Except
eAssist) on page 9‑57 or Trailer
Towing (eAssist) on page 9‑59
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
317 kg (700 lbs).
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (13,1)
Driving and Operating
9-13
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label is attached to the vehicle's
center pillar (B-pillar). The label
tells the gross weight capacity of
the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-14
Black plate (14,1)
Driving and Operating
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way
the vehicle handles.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
This could cause loss of
control and a crash.
Overloading can also shorten
the life of the vehicle.
If you put things inside the
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
WARNING (Continued)
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
Secure loose items in
the vehicle.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.
{ WARNING
Things inside the vehicle
can strike and injure people
in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
(Continued)
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (15,1)
Driving and Operating
Starting and
Operating
Between the first 1 000 km
(600 mi) and 5 000 km
(3,000 mi), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
can be used. Vehicle speeds
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
five minutes per use.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
During the first 1 000 km
(600 mi), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
110 km/h (68 mph).
9-15
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 9‑54 for the
trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more
information.
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-16
Black plate (16,1)
Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions
(Key Access)
The key must be fully extended to
start the vehicle.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency:
To shift out of P (Park), turn the
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake pedal.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑25 for more information.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
This is the only position from which
the key can be removed. This locks
the ignition and automatic
transmission.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑34.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (17,1)
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
9-17
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position provides power to some of
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
the ignition. To move the key from
ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
the shift lever must be in P (Park).
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not restart if
the battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
ventilation fan and 12‐volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights. This
position can also be used for
service and diagnostics, and to
verify the proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection
purposes. The transmission is also
unlocked in this position.
D (START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened when the
ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY
and the key is in the ignition.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-18
Black plate (18,1)
Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access)
The transmitter must be in the
vehicle for the system to operate.
If the pushbutton start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access
system. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must
be applied.
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton
start.
Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
Engine/OFF.
Stopping the Engine/OFF
(No LED Lights): When the
vehicle is stopped, press the engine
START/STOP button once to turn
the engine off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn off, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑25 for more
information.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
ignition will return to ACC/
ACCESSORY and display the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Transmission Messages on
page 5‑39 for more information.
When the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park), the ignition system will
switch to OFF.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (19,1)
Driving and Operating
After shifting to N (Neutral),
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑34.
{ WARNING
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle must be shut off while
driving, switch the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED
Light): This mode allows you to
use some electrical accessories
when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition will switch from
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
rundown.
ON/RUN/START (Green LED
Light): This mode is for driving and
starting. With the ignition off, and
the brake pedal applied, pressing
the button once will place the
ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
Once engine cranking begins,
release the button. Engine cranking
will continue until the engine starts.
See Starting the Engine on
page 9‑20 for more information.
The ignition will then remain
in ON/RUN.
9-19
Service Only Mode
This power mode is available for
service and diagnostics, and to
verify the proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection
purposes. With the vehicle off, and
the brake pedal not applied,
pressing and holding the button for
more than five seconds will place
the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The instruments and audio systems
will operate as they do in ON/RUN,
but the vehicle will not be able to be
driven. The engine will not start in
Service Only Mode. Push the button
again to turn the vehicle off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-20
Black plate (20,1)
Driving and Operating
Starting the Engine
Starting Procedure (Key Access)
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the ignition.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
five to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START,
or press the START button, for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (21,1)
Driving and Operating
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key or button, and the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Starting Procedure (Keyless
Access)
1. If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, the transmitter
must be in the vehicle. Put your
foot on the brake pedal and
push the START button. When
the engine begins cranking, let
go of the button.
The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
If the transmitter is not in the
vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter,
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display NO REMOTE
DETECTED. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25 for more information.
If the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
needs replacing, the DIC
displays REPLACE BATTERY
IN REMOTE KEY. The vehicle
can still be driven. See “Starting
the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery” in Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
9-21
components. If the START
button is pressed, and then
released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few
seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not
start and the button is pressed
for many seconds, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by pressing the START button a
second time.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-22
Black plate (22,1)
Driving and Operating
2. If the engine does not start after
five to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START,
or press the START button, for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key or button, and the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
eAssist Automatic Engine
Start/Stop
{ WARNING
Exiting the vehicle, without first
shifting into P (Park), may cause
the vehicle to move, you or others
may be injured. Because the
vehicle has the Automatic Engine
Start/Stop feature, the vehicle's
engine might seem to be shut off,
however, once the brake pedal is
released, the engine will start
up again.
Shift to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF, before
exiting the vehicle.
Vehicles with eAssist have an
automatic engine start/stop feature.
After the engine is started and has
reached operating temperature, the
auto stop feature may cause the
engine to turn off when the brakes
are applied and the vehicle comes
to a complete stop.
The vehicle may remain in auto stop
for up to two minutes. When the
brake is released or the accelerator
pedal applied, the engine will start.
The engine will continue to run until
the next auto stop.
AUTO STOP on the tachometer
signifies that the engine is in auto
stop mode. See Tachometer on
page 5‑11 for more information.
When the vehicle is turned off, the
tachometer will move to OFF. If the
driver door is opened while in auto
stop mode, a chime will sound.
To restart the engine during auto
stop, release the brake pedal or
press the accelerator pedal. The
engine starts immediately. The
vehicle continues to run until the
next stop.
There are several conditions which
may prevent an auto stop or cause
an auto start.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (23,1)
Driving and Operating
The Engine Will Remain
Running When:
The engine, transmission,
or high voltage battery is not
warmed up yet.
The outside temperature is less
than −20°C (−4°F).
The air conditioning or defrost
system need the compressor to
maintain vehicle comfort. See
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4 for more
information.
The shift lever is in P (Park),
N (Neutral), R (Reverse),
or M (Manual Mode).
The high voltage battery pack
charge is low.
The hood is not fully closed.
Brake pedal pressure is high.
If the MIL is on, auto stop may
be prevented.
The climate control system is
turned from off to normal air
conditioning or defrost. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4 for more
information.
The engine is required to run for
either heater or climate control
performance. See Dual
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4 for more
information.
The high voltage battery pack
charge is low and requires
recharging.
Auto stop time is greater than
two minutes.
The hood is opened.
The Engine Will Restart When:
The brake pedal is released.
The accelerator pedal is applied.
Shifting out of D (Drive) to any
other gear.
If the eco air conditioning button
is selected, the duration of the
auto stop will depend on the
outside temperature. This
economy mode improves fuel
economy by limiting the effects
of the air conditioning. The
warmer it is outside, the shorter
the time before the engine is
restarted to provide cabin
cooling.
9-23
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-24
Black plate (24,1)
Driving and Operating
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
3.6L V6 Engine
The electrical cord is located on
the driver side of the engine
compartment, between the
fender and the engine
compartment fuse block on
vehicles with a six cylinder
engine.
2.4L L4 Engine
The electrical cord is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment, between the
fender and the air cleaner on
vehicles with a four cylinder
engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (25,1)
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
Audio System
Power Windows
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Power to the audio system will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
Power to the power windows and
sunroof will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until any door
is opened.
All of these features will work
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
9-25
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑34
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-26
Black plate (26,1)
Driving and Operating
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal. See if
you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑54.
Shifting out of Park
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. The shift lock control
system is designed to:
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park).
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock is always functional
except in the case of an uncharged
or low voltage (less than 9‐volt)
battery.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (27,1)
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting (with or
without eAssist) on page 10‑90 or
Jump Starting (On-board with
eAssist Only) on page 10‑93.
3. Let up on the shift lever and
make sure the shift lever is
pushed all the way into P (Park).
If the shift lever cannot be moved
out of P (Park):
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
1. Apply and maintain the regular
brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
position. See Ignition Positions
(Key Access) on page 9‑16 or
Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access) on page 9‑18 for more
information.
4. Press the shift lever button.
5. Move the shift lever into the
desired gear.
9-27
Parking over Things
That Burn
{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-28
Black plate (28,1)
Driving and Operating
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑28.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (29,1)
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑25.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
9-29
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑25. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-30
Black plate (30,1)
Driving and Operating
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brake must be
fully applied first and then the shift
lever button pressed before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9‑26.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If more power is
needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
Notice: If the vehicle seems
to accelerate slowly or
not shift gears when you go
faster, and you continue to drive
the vehicle that way, you could
damage the transmission. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.
You can drive in L (Low) when
you are driving less than
56 km/h (35 mph) and D (Drive)
for higher speeds until then.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (31,1)
Driving and Operating
Manual Mode: This position is
shown on the shift lever as a +/−.
It allows the driver to select the
gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. See Manual Mode on
page 9‑31 for more information.
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
DSC allows you to shift an
automatic transmission similar to a
manual transmission. To use the
DSC feature:
9-31
With Selective Ride Control
Without Selective Ride Control
1. Move the shift lever to the left
from D (Drive).
1. Move the shift lever to the left
from D (Drive).
The vehicle will be in Sport
Mode. The gear indicator in the
DIC will still display a D for
Drive, and the SPORT MODE
ON message will be displayed
momentarily. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25. When you are in
Sport Mode, the vehicle will still
shift automatically, but chassis
tuning is modified. See Selective
Ride Control on page 9‑39.
If you move the shift lever
forward or rearward, the
transmission will enter Manual
Mode, and the DIC gear
indicator will change to
an M followed by a number
representing the gear the
vehicle is currently in.
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift
lever forward to upshift or
rearward to downshift.
The transmission will enter
Manual Mode. The DIC gear
indicator will change to
an M followed by a number
representing the gear the
vehicle is currently in.
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift
lever forward to upshift or
rearward to downshift.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-32
Black plate (32,1)
Driving and Operating
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (rpm). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine rpm is too high, nor to
the next higher gear when the
maximum engine rpm is reached.
Drive Systems
Uplevel Display Shown, Base
Model Similar
While in the DSC mode, the
transmission will automatically
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
The display on the instrument panel
cluster will show which gear the
vehicle is in. The number indicates
the requested gear range when
moving the shift lever forward or
rearward.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows you to
gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the system,
replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
See Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑89 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive
Vehicles with this feature always
send engine power to all four
wheels. It is fully automatic, and
adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
Black plate (33,1)
Driving and Operating
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑20.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
9-33
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012
9-34
Black plate (34,1)
Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
(DIC) messages. See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑33 for more
information. In case of insufficient
electrical power, the EPB cannot be
applied or released.
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the parking brake status light to
ensure that the parking brake is
applied.
EPB Apply
The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the
EPB is in the center console. The
EPB can always be activated, even
if the ignition is off. To prevent
draining the battery, avoid repeated
cycles of the EPB system when the
engine is not running.
The system has a parking brake
status light and a parking brake
warning light. See Electric Parking
Brake Light on page 5‑19. There are
also three Driver Information Center
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the parking brake status light will be
on. While the brake is being applied,
the status light will flash until full
apply is reached. If the light does
not come on, or remains flashing,
have the vehicle serviced. Do not
drive the vehicle if the parking brake
status light is flashing. See your
dealer. See Electric Parking Brake
Light on page 5‑19 for more
information.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE will
be displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
the EPB switch during deceleration
will release the parking brake. If the
switch is held in the up position until
the vehicle comes to a stop, the
EPB will remain applied.
If the parking brake status light
flashes continuously, the EPB is
only partially applied or released,
or there is a problem with the EPB.
The DIC message SERVICE PARK
BRAKE will be displayed. If this light
flashes continuously, release the
EPB, and attempt to apply it again.
If this light continues to flash, do not
drive the vehicle. See your dealer.
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Modify Date                     : 2011:11:22 15:47:46+01:00
Create Date                     : 2011:11:22 15:47:46+01:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:11:22 15:47:46+01:00
Creator Tool                    : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 00-Introduction 1..6
Document ID                     : uuid:86b41794-14dd-4d62-8d9b-cb69149bae71
Instance ID                     : uuid:160a9622-250f-4b40-bd16-bd0a7f126621
Producer                        : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
Page Count                      : 300
Creator                         : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: ACJ-GA-120-COLR

Navigation menu